Instruction Manual
Compact Inverter
Three-phase 200 V series: FRN0001 to 0020C2S-2…
Three-phase 400 V series: FRN0002 to 0011C2S-4…
Single-phase 200 V series: FRN0001 to 0012C2S-7…
Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC-Mini series of inverters.
• This product is designed to drive a three-phase induction motor and three-phase permanent
magnet synchronous motor. Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with the
handling procedure for correct use.
• Improper handling might result in incorrect operation, a short life, or even a failure of this
product as well as the motor.
• Deliver this manual to the end user of this product. Keep this manual in a safe place until this
product is discarded.
• For instructions on how to use an optional device, refer to the instruction and installation
manuals for that optional device.
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
INR-SI47-1729a-E
Copyright © 2013 Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji
Electric Co., Ltd.
All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.
The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement.
Table of Contents
Preface
............................................................. iii
„ Safety precautions................................................ iv
Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU... ix
„ Precautions for use............................................... xi
How this manual is organized ................................ xiv
Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR ...................4-1
4.1 Test Run.....................................................4-1
4.1.1 Checking prior to powering on...........4-1
4.1.2 Powering ON and checking ...............4-1
4.1.3 Preparation before a test run
--Configuring function code data........4-2
4.1.4 Test run..............................................4-5
4.2 Operation ...................................................4-5
4.2.1 Jogging Operation .............................4-6
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER.... 1-1
1.1 Acceptance Inspection .............................. 1-1
1.2 External Views........................................... 1-2
1.3 Transportation ........................................... 1-2
1.4 Storage Environment................................. 1-3
1.4.1 Temporary storage ............................ 1-3
1.4.2 Long-term storage............................. 1-3
Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES ..........................5-1
5.1 Function Code Tables ................................5-1
5.2 Details of Function Codes ........................5-21
5.3 Notes in Driving PMSM............................5-78
Chapter 2
MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE
INVERTER........................................ 2-1
2.1 Operating Environment ............................. 2-1
2.2 Installing the Inverter ................................. 2-1
2.3 Wiring ........................................................ 2-2
2.3.1 Removing and mounting the terminal
block covers ...................................... 2-2
2.3.2 Terminal arrangement and screw
specifications .................................... 2-3
2.3.3 Recommended wire sizes ................. 2-4
2.3.4 Wiring precautions ............................ 2-6
2.3.5 Wiring for main circuit terminals and
grounding terminals .......................... 2-7
2.3.6 Wiring for control circuit terminals ... 2-11
2.3.7 Setting up the jumper switches ....... 2-18
2.3.8 Cautions relating to harmonic
component, noise, and leakage
current............................................. 2-20
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING ......................6-1
6.1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting ...6-1
6.2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED
Monitor.......................................................6-2
6.2.1 Abnormal motor operation .................6-2
6.2.2 Problems with inverter settings..........6-8
6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED
Monitor.....................................................6-10
6.4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the
LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is
Displayed .................................................6-24
Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION .7-1
7.1 Daily Inspection..........................................7-1
7.2 Periodic Inspection.....................................7-1
7.3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts .........7-3
7.3.1 Judgment on service life....................7-4
7.4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in
Main Circuit ................................................7-6
7.5 Insulation Test ............................................7-8
7.6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee .....7-9
7.6.1 When making an inquiry ....................7-9
7.6.2 Product warranty ...............................7-9
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD . 3-1
3.1 Names and Functions of Keypad
Components .............................................. 3-1
3.2 Overview of Operation Modes ................... 3-2
3.3 Running mode ........................................... 3-4
3.3.1 Monitoring the running status............ 3-4
3.3.2 Setting up reference frequency and
PID process command...................... 3-5
3.3.3 Running/stopping the motor.............. 3-7
3.4 Programming mode................................... 3-8
3.4.1 Setting up the function codes
– "Data Setting"............................... 3-10
3.4.2 Checking changed function codes
– "Data Checking"........................... 3-13
3.4.3 Monitoring the running status
– "Drive Monitoring" ........................ 3-15
3.4.4 Checking I/O signal status
– "I/O Checking".............................. 3-19
3.4.5 Reading maintenance information
– "Maintenance Information" ........... 3-23
3.4.6 Reading alarm information
– "Alarm Information" ...................... 3-26
3.5 Alarm mode ............................................. 3-29
Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS.............................8-1
8.1 Standard Models ........................................8-1
8.1.1 Three-phase 200 V class series ........8-1
8.1.2 Three-phase 400 V class series ........8-2
8.1.3 Single-phase 200 V class series .......8-3
8.2 Common Specifications .............................8-4
8.3 Terminal Specifications ..............................8-7
8.3.1 Terminal functions..............................8-7
8.3.2 Connection diagram in operation
by external signal inputs ....................8-7
8.4 External Dimensions ..................................8-9
8.4.1 Standard models................................8-9
8.5 Protective Functions ................................ 8-11
Chapter 9
LIST OF PERIPHERAL
EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS............9-1
Chapter 10 APPLICATION OF DC
REACTORS (DCRs)........................10-1
i
Chapter 11 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS ..11-1
11.1 Compliance with European Standards .....11-1
11.2 Compliance with EMC Standards .............11-2
11.2.1 General ............................................11-2
11.2.2 Recommended installation
procedure.........................................11-2
11.2.3 Leakage current of EMC-complaint
filter (optional) ..................................11-4
11.3 Harmonic Component Regulation in the
EU 11-5
11.3.1 General comments...........................11-5
11.3.2 Compliance with the harmonic
component regulation ......................11-6
11.4 Compliance with the Low Voltage
Directive in the EU....................................11-6
11.4.1 General ............................................11-6
11.4.2 Points for consideration when using
the FRENIC-Mini series in a system
to be certified by the Low Voltage
Directive in the EU ...........................11-6
ii
Preface
Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC-Mini series of inverters.
This product is designed to drive a three-phase induction motor and three-phase permanent magnet
synchronous motor (PMSM). Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with proper handling and operation of this product.
Improper handling might result in incorrect operation, a short life, or even a failure of this product as
well as the motor.
Have this manual delivered to the end user of this product. Keep this manual in a safe place until this
product is discarded.
Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC-Mini. Read them in conjunction
with this manual as necessary.
• FRENIC-Mini User's Manual
(24A7-E-0023)
• RS-485 Communication User's Manual
(MEH448)
• Catalog
(24A1-E-0011)
The materials are subject to change without notice. Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use.
Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and General-purpose Appliances
Fuji three-phase 200 V class series of inverters with a capacity of 3.7 (4.0) kW or less, single-phase
200 V class series with 2.2 kW or less, and single-phase 100 V class series with 0.75 kW or less
were once subject to the "Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and
General-purpose Appliances" (established in September 1994 and revised in October 1999), published by the Ministry of International Trade and Industry (currently the Ministry of Economy, Trade
and Industry (METI)).
Since the revision of the guideline in January 2004, however, these inverters have no longer been
subject to the guideline. The individual inverter manufacturers have voluntarily employed harmonics
suppression measures.
As our measure, it is recommended that DC reactors (DCRs) authorized in this manual be connected to the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters.
When using DCRs not authorized in this manual, however, consult your Fuji Electric representative
for the detailed specifications.
Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving
High Voltage or Special High Voltage
Refer to the FRENIC-Mini User's Manual (24A7-E-0023), Appendix C for details on this guideline.
iii
„ Safety precautions
Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation, connections (wiring), operation, or
maintenance and inspection. Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize
yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter.
Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may
lead to dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in death or
serious bodily injuries.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may
lead to dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in minor or
light bodily injuries and/or substantial property damage.
Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences. These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times.
Application
• FRENIC-Mini is designed to drive a three-phase induction motor and three-phase permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM). Do not use it for single-phase motors or for
other purposes.
Fire or an accident could occur.
• FRENIC-Mini may not be used for a life-support system or other purposes directly related
to the human safety.
• Though FRENIC-Mini is manufactured under strict quality control, install safety devices for
applications where serious accidents or material losses are foreseen in relation to the
failure of it.
An accident could occur.
Installation
• Install the inverter on a nonflammable material such as metal.
Otherwise fire could occur.
• Do not place flammable matter nearby.
Doing so could cause fire.
iv
• Do not support the inverter by its terminal block cover during transportation.
Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries.
• Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic chips, or other foreign materials from
getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink.
Otherwise, a fire or an accident might result.
• Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts.
Doing so could cause fire, an accident or injuries.
• Do not get on a shipping box.
• Do not stack shipping boxes higher than the indicated information printed on those boxes.
Doing so could cause injuries.
Wiring
• When wiring the inverter to the power source, insert a recommended molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage
circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) in the path of power lines. Use the
devices within the recommended current range.
• Use wires in the specified size.
• When wiring the inverter to the power supply of 500 kVA or more, be sure to connect an
optional DC reactor (DCR).
Otherwise, fire could occur.
• Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors.
• Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
Doing so could cause fire.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wires without fail.
Otherwise, electric shock or fire could occur.
• Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.
• Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power off.
• Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
• Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
• Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the
number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be
connected.
Otherwise fire or an accident could occur.
• Do not connect the power source wires to output terminals (U, V, and W).
• Do not insert a braking resistor between terminals P (+) and N (-), P1 and N (-), P (+) and
P1, DB and N (-), or P1 and DB.
Doing so could cause fire or an accident.
v
• Generally, control signal wires are not reinforced insulation. If they accidentally touch any
of live parts in the main circuit, their insulation coat may break for any reasons. In such a
case, an extremely high voltage may be applied to the signal lines. Make a complete
remedy to protect the signal line from contacting any hot high voltage lines.
Doing so could cause an accident or electric shock.
• Wire the three-phase motor to terminals U, V, and W of the inverter, aligning phases each
other.
Otherwise injuries could occur.
• The inverter, motor and wiring generate electric noise. Take care of malfunction of the
nearby sensors and devices. To prevent the motor from malfunctioning, implement noise
control measures.
Otherwise an accident could occur.
Operation
• Be sure to install the terminal block cover before turning the power on. Do not remove the
cover while power is applied.
Otherwise electric shock could occur.
• Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Doing so could cause electric shock.
• If the retry function has been selected, the inverter may automatically restart and drive the
motor depending on the cause of tripping.
(Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting.)
• If the stall prevention function (current limiter), automatic deceleration, and overload
prevention control have been selected, the inverter may operate at an acceleration/deceleration time or frequency different from the set ones. Design the machine so that
safety is ensured even in such cases.
Otherwise an accident could occur.
• The STOP key is only effective when function setting (Function code F02) has been established to enable the STOP key. Prepare an emergency stop switch separately. If you
disable the STOP key priority function and enable operation by external commands, you
cannot emergency-stop the inverter using the STOP key on the built-in keypad.
• If an alarm reset is made with the operation signal turned on, a sudden start will occur.
Ensure that the operation signal is turned off in advance.
Otherwise an accident could occur.
vi
• If you enable the "restart mode after momentary power failure" (Function code F14 = 4 or
5), then the inverter automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered.
(Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting.)
• If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction
manual and the FRENIC-Mini User's Manual, the motor may rotate with a torque or at a
speed not permitted for the machine.
An accident or injuries could occur.
• Do not touch the inverter terminals while the power is applied to the inverter even if the
inverter stops.
Doing so could cause electric shock.
• Do not turn the main circuit power on or off in order to start or stop inverter operation.
Doing so could cause failure.
• Do not touch the heat sink or braking resistor because they become very hot.
Doing so could cause burns.
• Setting the inverter to high speeds is easy. Before changing the frequency (speed) setting,
check the specifications of the motor and machinery.
• The brake function of the inverter does not provide mechanical holding means.
Injuries could occur.
Maintenance and inspection, and parts replacement
• Turn the power off and wait for at least five minutes before starting inspection. Further,
check that the LED monitor is unlit, and check the DC link bus voltage between the P (+)
and N (-) terminals to be lower than 25 VDC.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
• Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons.
• Take off the watch, rings and other metallic matter before starting work.
• Use insulated tools.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
vii
Disposal
• Handle the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it.
Otherwise injuries could occur.
Others
• Never attempt to modify the inverter.
Doing so could cause electric shock or injuries.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of
detail parts. Restore the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in
the manual before starting operation.
viii
Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU
If installed according to the guidelines given below, inverters marked with CE are considered as
compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
1. The ground terminal G should always be connected to the ground. Do not use only a
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)* as
the sole method of electric shock protection. Be sure to use ground wires whose size is
greater than power supply lines.
* With overcurrent protection.
2. When used with the inverter, a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) or
magnetic contactor (MC) should conform to the EN or IEC standards.
3. When you use a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB) for protection from electric shock in direct or indirect contact power lines or
nodes, be sure to install type B of RCD/ELCB on the input (primary) of the inverter if the
power source is three-phase 200/400 V. For single-phase 200 V power supplies, use type
A.
When you use no RCD/ELCB, take any other protective measure that isolates the electric
equipment from other equipment on the same power supply line using double or reinforced
insulation or that isolates the power supply lines connected to the electric equipment using
an isolation transformer.
4. The inverter should be used in an environment that does not exceed Pollution Degree 2
requirements. If the environment conforms to Pollution Degree 3 or 4, install the inverter in
an enclosure of IP54 or higher.
5. Install the inverter, AC or DC reactor, input or output filter in an enclosure with minimum
degree of protection of IP2X (Top surface of enclosure shall be minimum IP4X when it can
be easily accessed), to prevent human body from touching directly to live parts of these
equipment.
6. To make an inverter with no integrated EMC filter conform to the EMC directive, it is necessary to connect an external EMC filter to the inverter and install them properly so that the
entire equipment including the inverter conforms to the EMC directive.
7. Do not connect any copper wire directly to grounding terminals. Use crimp terminals with tin
or equivalent plating to connect them.
8. To connect the three-phase or single-phase 200 V class series of inverters to the power
supply in Overvoltage Category III or to connect the three-phase 400 V class series of inverters to the power supply in Overvoltage Category II or III, a supplementary insulation is
required for the control circuitry.
9. When using inverters at an altitude of more than 2000 m, note that the basic insulation
applies to the insulation degree of the control circuitry. At an altitude of more than 3000 m,
inverters cannot be used.
10. The power supply mains neutral has to be earthed for the three-phase 400 V class inverter.
11. The inverter has been tested with IEC61800-5-1 2007 5.2.3.6.3 Short-circuit Current Test
under the following conditions.
Short-circuit current in the supply: 10 kA
Maximum 240 V
Maximum 480 V
ix
Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU (Continued)
Single-phase 200 V
Three-phase 400 V
Three-phase 200 V
Power supply voltage
12. Use wires listed in IEC60364-5-52.
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Inverter type
Recommended wire size (mm2 )
*2
*2
*1
Main circuit
DCR
Rated current (A)
Control
*2
power input
[P1,
of
[L1/R, L2/S, L3/T] Inverter P (+)] circuit
MCCB or RCD/ELCB
(30A,
output
[L1/L, L2/N]
Braking
[U, V, resistor 30B,
Grounding [ G]
30C)
W]
[P (+),
*3
*3
DB]
w/ DCR w/o DCR w/ DCR w/o DCR
0.1
FRN0001C2S-2□
0.2
FRN0002C2S-2□
0.4
FRN0004C2S-2□
0.75
FRN0006C2S-2□
10
1.5
FRN0010C2S-2□
16
2.2
FRN0012C2S-2□
3.7
FRN0020C2S-2□
0.4
FRN0002C2S-4□
0.75
FRN0004C2S-4□
1.5
FRN0005C2S-4□
10
2.2
FRN0007C2S-4□
16
3.7
(4.0)*
6
10
6
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
2.5
2.5
2.5
0.5
2.5
0.5
20
20
6
35
6
2.5
10
FRN0011C2S-4□
20
0.1
FRN0001C2S-7□
0.2
FRN0002C2S-7□
0.4
FRN0004C2S-7□
0.75
FRN0006C2S-7□
10
16
1.5
FRN0010C2S-7□
16
20
2.2
FRN0012C2S-7□
20
35
6
6
10
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
0.5
4
4
6
4
MCCB: Molded case circuit breaker
RCD: Residual-current-operated protective device
ELCB: Earth leakage circuit breaker
Note: A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination. For
three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it replaces A or U.
* 4.0 kW for the EU. The inverter type is FRN0011C2S-4E.
*1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) will vary,
depending on the power transformer capacity. Refer to the related technical documentation for
details.
*2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70°C 600V PVC wires used at an ambient
temperature of 40°C.
*3 In the case of no DC reactor, the wire sizes are determined on the basis of the effective input
current calculated under the condition that the power supply capacity and impedance are 500 kVA
and 5%, respectively.
x
„ Precautions for use
Driving a 400 V
general-purpose
motor
When driving a 400 V general-purpose motor with an inverter
using extremely long wires, damage to the insulation of the
motor may occur. Use an output circuit filter (OFL) if necessary after checking with the motor manufacturer. Fuji motors
do not require the use of output circuit filters because of their
good insulation.
Torque characteristics and
temperature rise
When the inverter is used to run a general-purpose motor, the
temperature of the motor becomes higher than when it is
operated using a commercial power supply. In the low-speed
range, the cooling effect will be weakened, so decrease the
output torque of the motor. If constant torque is required in
the low-speed range, use a Fuji inverter motor or a motor
equipped with an externally powered ventilating fan.
In running
generalpurpose
motors
When an inverter-driven motor is mounted to a machine,
resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the
machine system.
Vibration
Note that operation of a 2-pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may
cause abnormal vibration.
* The use of a rubber coupling or vibration dampening rubber
is recommended.
* Use the inverter's jump frequency control feature to skip
the resonance frequency zone(s).
In running
special motors
Noise
When an inverter is used with a general-purpose motor, the
motor noise level is higher than that with a commercial power
supply. To reduce noise, raise carrier frequency of the inverter. Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher
noise level.
High-speed motors
If the reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or more to drive a
high-speed motor, test-run the combination of the inverter
and motor beforehand to check for safe operation.
Explosion-proof
motors
When driving an explosion-proof motor with an inverter, use a
combination of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance.
Submersible motors and pumps
Brake motors
These motors have a larger rated current than general-purpose motors. Select an inverter whose rated output
current is greater than that of the motor.
These motors differ from general-purpose motors in thermal
characteristics. Set a low value in the thermal time constant
of the motor when setting the electronic thermal function.
For motors equipped with parallel-connected brakes, their
braking power must be supplied from the input (primary)
circuit. If the brake power is connected to the inverter's output
(secondary) circuit by mistake, the brake will not work.
Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with series-connected brakes.
xi
In running
special
motors
Geared motors
If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil-lubricated
gearbox or speed changer/reducer, then continuous motor
operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication. Avoid
such operation.
Synchronous motors
It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this
motor type. For details about the PMSM drive, refer to Chapter 5,
Single-phase
motors
Environmental
conditions
Installation location
Installing an
MCCB or
RCD/ELCB
Installing an MC
in the secondary
circuit
Section 5.3 "Notes in Driving PMSM."
Single-phase motors are not suitable for inverter-driven
variable speed operation. Use three-phase motors.
* Even if a single-phase power supply is available, use a
three-phase motor as the inverter provides three-phase
output.
The heat sink and braking resistor of the inverter may become hot under certain operating conditions, so install the
inverter on nonflammable material such as metal.
Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental
conditions specified in Chapter 2, Section 2.1 "Operating
Environment."
Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth
leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection)
in the input (primary) circuit of the inverter to protect the
wiring. Do not use the circuit breaker capacity exceeding the
recommended rated current.
If a magnetic contactor (MC) is mounted in the inverter's
secondary circuit for switching the motor to commercial
power or for any other purpose, ensure that both the inverter
and the motor are completely stopped before you turn the MC
on or off.
Do not connect a magnet contactor united with a surge killer
to the inverter's secondary circuit.
Combination with
peripheral
devices
Installing an MC
in the primary
circuit
Protecting the
motor
Do not turn the magnetic contactor (MC) in the input (primary)
circuit on or off more than once an hour as an inverter failure
may result.
If frequent starts or stops are required during motor operation, use FWD/REV signals or the
/
keys.
The electronic thermal function of the inverter can protect the
motor. The operation level and the motor type (general-purpose motor, inverter motor) should be set. For
high-speed motors or water-cooled motors, set a small value
for the thermal time constant and protect the motor.
If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a
long wire, a high-frequency current may flow into the wiring
stray capacitance. This may cause the relay to trip at a current lower than the set value for the thermal relay. If this
happens, lower the carrier frequency or use the output circuit
filter (OFL).
xii
Combination with
peripheral
devices
Discontinuance
of power-factor
correcting capacitor
Do not mount power-factor correcting capacitors in the inverter’s primary circuit. (Use the DC reactor to improve the
inverter power factor.) Do not use power-factor correcting
capacitors in the inverter output circuit. An overcurrent trip
will occur, disabling motor operation.
Discontinuance
of surge killer
Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's secondary
circuit.
Reducing noise
Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to
satisfy EMC directives.
Measures against
surge currents
If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or
operated under a light load, it is assumed that the surge
current is generated by open/close of the phase-advancing
capacitor in the power system.
* Connect a DC reactor to the inverter.
Wiring
Megger test
When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter, use a
500 V Megger and follow the instructions contained in
Chapter 7, Section 7.5 "Insulation Test."
Control circuit
wiring length
When using remote control, limit the wiring length between
the inverter and operator box to 20 m or less and use twisted
pair or shielded cable.
Wiring length
between inverter
and motor
If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor, the
inverter will overheat or trip as a result of overcurrent
(high-frequency current flowing into the stray capacitance) in
the wires connected to the phases. Ensure that the wiring is
shorter than 50 m. If this length must be exceeded, lower the
carrier frequency or mount an output circuit filter (OFL).
Wiring size
Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the
current value or recommended wire size.
Wiring type
Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several
inverters with motors.
Grounding
Selecting
inverter
capacity
Driving general-purpose
motor
Driving special
motors
Transportation and
storage
Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal.
Select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor
listed in the standard specifications table for the inverter.
When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or
deceleration is required, select an inverter with a capacity
one size greater than the standard.
Select an inverter that meets the following condition:
Inverter rated current > Motor rated current
When exporting an inverter built in a panel or equipment, pack them in a previously
fumigated wooden crate. Do not fumigate them after packing since some parts
inside the inverter may be corroded by halogen compounds such as methyl bromide used in fumigation.
When packing an inverter alone for export, use a laminated veneer lumber (LVL).
For other transportation and storage instructions, see Chapter 1, Section 1.3
"Transportation" and Section 1.4 "Storage Environment."
xiii
How this manual is organized
This manual is made up of chapters 1 through 11.
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER
This chapter describes acceptance inspection and precautions for transportation and storage of the
inverter.
Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER
This chapter provides operating environment, precautions for installing the inverter, wiring instructions for the motor and inverter.
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad. The inverter features three operation
modes (Running, Programming and Alarm modes) which enable you to run and stop the motor,
monitor running status, set function code data, display running information required for maintenance,
and display alarm data.
Chapter 4 OPERATION
This chapter describes preparation to be made before running the motor for a test and practical
operation.
Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES
This chapter provides a list of the function codes. Function codes to be used often and irregular ones
are described individually.
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or
detects an alarm condition. In this chapter, first check whether any alarm code is displayed or not,
and then proceed to the troubleshooting items.
Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
This chapter describes inspection, measurement and insulation test which are required for safe
inverter operation. It also provides information about periodical replacement parts and guarantee of
the product.
Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter lists specifications including output ratings, control system, external dimensions and
protective functions.
Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS
This chapter describes main peripheral equipment and options which can be connected to the
FRENIC-Mini series of inverters.
Chapter 10 APPLICATION OF DC REACTOR (DCRs)
This chapter describes a DC reactor that suppresses input harmonic component current.
Chapter 11 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS
This chapter describes standards with which the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters comply.
xiv
Icons
The following icons are used throughout this manual.
This icon indicates information which, if not heeded, can result in the inverter not operating
to full efficiency, as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which
can result in accidents.
This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or
operations.
This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information.
xv
Chapter 1
BEFORE USING THE INVERTER
1.1 Acceptance Inspection
Unpack the package and check that:
(1) An inverter and instruction manual (this manual) are contained in the package.
(2) The inverter has not been damaged during transportation—there should be no dents or parts
missing.
(3) The inverter is the model you ordered. You can check the model name and specifications on the
main nameplate. (Main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter and are located as
shown on the next page.)
(a) Main Nameplate
(b) Sub Nameplate
Figure 1.1 Nameplates
TYPE: Type of inverter
SOURCE:
Number of input phases (three-phase: 3PH, single-phase: 1PH), input voltage, input
frequency, input current
OUTPUT:
Number of output phases, rated output capacity, rated output voltage, output
frequency range, rated output current, and overload capacity
SER. No.:
Product number
Manufacturing date
320
W 3 3 A 1 2 3 A 0 0 0 1 AA
Production week
This indicates the week number that is
numbered from 1st week of January.
The 1st week of January is indicated as
'01'.
Production year: Last digit of year
If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product,
contact your Fuji Electric representative.
1-1
1.2 External Views
(1) External views
Control circuit
terminal block cover
Sub nameplate
Keypad
Main circuit
terminal block
cover
Main nameplate
Main nameplate
Control circuit terminal bock cover
Figure 1.2 External Views of FRENIC-Mini
(2) Wiring section
Barrier for the RS-485
communications port*
Control signal cable
port
DB, P1, P (+) and N (-) wire port
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, U, V, W,
grounding wire port
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, P1, P (+), N (-)
wire port
DB, U, V, W,
grounding wire port
Cooling
fan
(a) FRN0006C2S-2†
(b) FRN0010C2S-2†
(* When connecting the RS-485 communications cable, remove the control circuit terminal block cover and
cut off the barrier provided in it using nippers.)
Note: A box (†) in the above model names replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination.
For three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it replaces A or U.
Figure 1.3 Wiring Section
1.3 Transportation
• When carrying the inverter, always support its bottom at the front and rear sides with both hands.
Do not hold covers or individual parts only. You may drop the inverter or break it.
• Avoid applying excessively strong force to the terminal block covers as they are made of plastic
and are easily broken.
1-2
1.4 Storage Environment
1.4.1
Temporary storage
Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1 Environmental Requirements for Storage and Transportation
Item
Requirements
Storage
1
temperature *
-25 to +70°C
Relative
humidity
5 to 95% *
Atmosphere
The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive or flammable
gases, oil mist, vapor, water drops or vibration. The atmosphere can contain only a
low level of salt. (0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
Atmospheric
pressure
Locations where the inverter is not
subject to abrupt changes in
temperature that would result in the
formation of condensation or ice.
2
86 to 106 kPa (in storage)
70 to 106 kPa (during transportation)
*1 Assuming a comparatively short storage period (e.g., during transportation or the like).
*2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements, avoid such places where the inverter will be
subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form.
Precautions for temporary storage
(1) Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor.
(2) If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements listed in Table 1.1, wrap the
inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage.
(3) If the inverter is to be stored in an environment with a high level of humidity, put a drying agent
(such as silica gel) in the airtight package described in item (2).
1.4.2
Long-term storage
The long-term storage methods for the inverter vary largely according to the environment of the
storage site. General storage methods are described below.
(1) The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage.
However, for storage exceeding three months, the ambient temperature should be within the
range from -10 to +30°C. This is to prevent the electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from
deteriorating.
(2) The inverter must be stored in a package that is airtight to protect it from moisture. Include a
drying agent inside the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package to within
70%.
(3) If the inverter has been installed in the equipment or control board at a construction site where it
may be subjected to humidity, dust or dirt, then remove the inverter and store it in a suitable
environment specified in Table 1.1.
Precautions for storage over 1 year
If the inverter will not be powered on for a long time, the property of the electrolytic capacitors may
deteriorate. Power the inverters on once a year and keep them on for 30 to 60 minutes. Do not
connect the inverters to motors or run the motor.
1-3
Chapter 2
MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER
2.1 Operating Environment
Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2.1.
Table 2.2 Output Current Derating Factor in
Relation to Altitude
Table 2.1 Environmental Requirements
Item
Specifications
Site location
Indoors
Ambient
temperature
-10 to +50°C (IP20) (Note 1)
Relative
humidity
5 to 95% (No condensation)
Atmosphere
The inverter must not be exposed to dust,
direct sunlight, corrosive gases, flammable
gas, oil mist, vapor or water drops. (Note 2)
The atmosphere can contain only a low level
of salt.
(0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
The inverter must not be subjected to sudden
changes in temperature that will cause
condensation to form.
Altitude
1,000 m max. (Note 3)
Atmospheric
pressure
86 to 106 kPa
Vibration
3 mm (Max. amplitude)
9.8 m/s2
2 m/s2
1 m/s2
2 to less than 9 Hz
9 to less than 20 Hz
20 to less than 55 Hz
55 to less than 200 Hz
Altitude
Output current
derating factor
1000 m or lower
1.00
1000 to 1500 m
0.97
1500 to 2000 m
0.95
2000 to 2500 m
0.91
2500 to 3000 m
0.88
(Note 1) When inverters are mounted
side-by-side without any gap between them,
the ambient temperature should be within
the range from -10 to +40°C.
(Note 2) Do not install the inverter in an
environment where it may be exposed to
cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will
clog the heat sink in the inverter. If the
inverter is to be used in such an environment, install it in the panel of your system or
other dustproof containers.
(Note 3) If you use the inverter in an altitude
above 1000 m, you should apply an output
current derating factor as listed in Table 2.2.
2.2 Installing the Inverter
(1) Mounting base
Top 100 mm
The temperature of the heat sink may rise up to
approx. 90°C during operation of the inverter, so
the inverter should be mounted on a base made of
material that can withstand temperatures of this
level.
Install the inverter on a base made of metal or
other non-flammable material.
A fire may result with other material.
Left
Right
10 mm
10 mm
(2) Clearances
Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in
Figure 2.1 are maintained at all times. When
installing the inverter in the panel of your system,
take extra care with ventilation inside the panel as
the temperature around the inverter tends to
increase.
2-1
Bottom 100 mm
Figure 2.1 Mounting Direction and
Required Clearances
When mounting two or more inverters
When mounting two or more inverters in the same unit or panel, basically lay them out side by side.
As long as the ambient temperature is 40°C or lower, inverters can be mounted side by side without
any clearance between them. When mounting the inverters necessarily, one above the other, be
sure to separate them with a partition plate or the like so that any heat radiating from an inverter will
not affect the one(s) above.
(3) Mounting direction
Secure the inverter to the mounting base with four screws or bolts (M4) so that the FRENIC-Mini logo
faces outwards. Tighten those screws or bolts perpendicular to the mounting base.
Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally. Doing so will reduce the heat
dissipation efficiency of the inverter and cause the overheat protection function to operate,
so the inverter will not run.
Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic chips, or other foreign materials from getting
into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink.
This may result in a fire or accident.
2.3 Wiring
Follow the procedure below. (In the following description, the inverter has already been installed.)
2.3.1
Removing and mounting the terminal block covers
(1) Loosen the screw securing the control circuit terminal block cover.
(2) Insert your finger in the cutout (near "PULL") in the bottom of the control circuit terminal block
cover, then pull the cover towards you.
(3) Hold both sides of the main circuit terminal block cover between thumb and forefinger and slide
it towards you.
(4) After performing wiring, mount the main circuit terminal block cover and control circuit terminal
block cover in the reverse order of removal.
Control circuit terminal
block cover screw
Control circuit terminal
block cover
Main circuit terminal block cover
Figure 2.2 Removing the Terminal Block Covers
2-2
2.3.2
Terminal arrangement and screw specifications
The figures below show the arrangement of the main and control circuit terminals which differs
according to inverter type. The two terminals prepared for grounding, which are indicated by the
symbol G in Figures A to D, make no distinction between the power supply side (primary circuit)
and the motor side (secondary circuit).
(1) Arrangement of the main circuit terminals
Table 2.3 Main Circuit Terminals
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Threephase
400 V
Singlephase
200 V
Nominal applied motor
(kW)
Inverter type
0.1
0.2
FRN0001C2S-2†
FRN0002C2S-2†
0.4
FRN0004C2S-2†
0.75
FRN0006C2S-2†
1.5
FRN0010C2S-2†
2.2
FRN0012C2S-2†
3.7
FRN0020C2S-2†
0.4
FRN0002C2S-4†
0.75
FRN0004C2S-4†
1.5
FRN0005C2S-4†
2.2
FRN0007C2S-4†
3.7
(4.0)*
FRN0011C2S-4†
0.1
FRN0001C2S-7†
0.2
FRN0002C2S-7†
0.4
FRN0004C2S-7†
0.75
FRN0006C2S-7†
1.5
FRN0010C2S-7†
2.2
FRN0012C2S-7†
Terminal
screw size
Tightening
torque
(N·m)
Refer to:
M3.5
1.2
Figure A
M4
1.8
Figure B
M3.5
1.2
Figure C
M4
1.8
Figure D
Note: A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination. For
three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it replaces A or U.
* 4.0 kW for the EU. The inverter type is FRN0011C2S-4E.
2-3
(2) Arrangement of the control circuit terminals (common to all FRENIC-Mini models)
Y1
Y1E
11
30A
30B
12
FMA
13
C1
11
PLC
X1
CM
X2
FWD
REV
X3
CM
30C
Screw size: M 2 Tightening torque: 0.2 N•m
Screw size: M 2.5 Tightening torque: 0.4 N•m
Table 2.4 Control Circuit Terminals
Terminal
symbol
Ferrule terminal*
Bared wire
Opening dimension in
length
the terminal block
Allowable wire size
Screwdriver
(Shape of tip,
B x A)
Thickness of tip: B
[30A], [30B],
[30C]
Flat screwdriver
(0.6 x 3.5 mm)
AWG22 to AWG18
(0.34 to 0.75 mm2)
6 to 7 mm 2.8 (W) x 1.7 (H) mm
Other than
the above
Flat screwdriver
(0.5 x 2.4 mm)
AWG24 to AWG18
(0.25 to 0.75 mm2)
5 to 6 mm 1.7 (W) x 1.4 (H) mm
* Manufacturer of ferrule terminals: WAGO Company of Japan, Ltd. Refer to Table 2.5.
Table 2.5 Recommended Ferrule Terminals
Type (216-†††)
Screw size
M2
M2 or M2.5
Wire size
With insulated collar
Without insulated collar
Short type
Long type
Short type
AWG24 (0.25 mm2 )
321
301
151
Long type
131
AWG22 (0.34 mm2 )
322
302
152
132
AWG20 (0.50 mm2 )
221
201
121
101
AWG18 (0.75 mm2 )
222
202
122
102
The length of bared wires to be inserted into ferrule terminals is 5.0 mm or 8.0 mm for the short or long type,
respectively.
The following crimping tool is recommended: Variocrimp 4 (Part No. 206-204).
2.3.3
Recommended wire sizes
Table 2.6 lists the recommended wire sizes. The recommended wire sizes for the main circuit
terminals for an ambient temperature of 50°C are indicated for two types of wire: HIV single wire (for
the maximum allowable temperature 75°C) (before a slash (/)) and IV single wire (for 60°C) (after a
slash (/)),
2-4
Power supply voltage
Table 2.6 Recommended Wire Sizes
*1
Recommended wire size (mm2 )
Nominal
applied
motor
(kW)
Main circuit
Inverter type
Main circuit power input
[L1/R, L2/S, L3/T]
[L1/L, L2/N]
Grounding [ G]
Single-phase 200 V
Three-phase 400 V
Three-phase 200 V
w/ DCR
0.1
FRN0001C2S-2†
0.2
FRN0002C2S-2†
0.4
FRN0004C2S-2†
0.75
FRN0006C2S-2†
1.5
FRN0010C2S-2†
2.2
FRN0012C2S-2†
3.7
FRN0020C2S-2†
0.4
FRN0002C2S-4†
0.75
FRN0004C2S-4†
1.5
FRN0005C2S-4†
2.2
FRN0007C2S-4†
3.7
(4.0)*
FRN0011C2S-4†
0.1
FRN0001C2S-7†
0.2
FRN0002C2S-7†
0.4
FRN0004C2S-7†
0.75
FRN0006C2S-7†
1.5
FRN0010C2S-7†
2.2
FRN0012C2S-7†
*2
w/o DCR
Inverter
output
[U, V, W]
DCR
[P1, P (+)]
Braking Control
resistor
circuit
[P (+), DB]
–
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 5.5
(2.5)
2.0 / 3.5
(2.5)
2.0 / 3.5
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
0.5
–
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 2.0
(2.5)
2.0 / 3.5
(4.0)
2.0 / 3.5
(4.0)
3.5 / 5.5
(6.0)
2.0 / 3.5
(4.0)
DCR: DC reactor
Note: A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination. For
three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it replaces A or U.
* 4.0 kW for the EU. The inverter type is FRN0011C2S-4E.
*1 Use crimp terminals covered with an insulated sheath or insulating tube. Recommended wire sizes are
for HIV/IV (PVC in the EU).
*2 Wire sizes are calculated on the basis of input RMS current under the condition that the power supply
capacity and impedance are 500 kVA and 5%, respectively.
*3 Insert the DC reactor (DCR) in either of the primary power input lines. Refer to Chapter 10 for more
details.
2-5
2.3.4
Wiring precautions
Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter.
(1) Make sure that the source voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate.
(2) Be sure to connect the power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1/R, L2/S and
L3/T (for three-phase voltage input) or L1/L and L2/N (for single-phase voltage input) of the
inverter. If the power wires are connected to other terminals, the inverter will be damaged when
the power is turned on.
(3) Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock, fire or other disasters and to
reduce electric noise.
(4) Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure
a reliable connection.
(5) Keep the power supply wiring (primary circuit) and motor wiring (secondary circuit) of the main
circuit, and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other.
•
•
When wiring the inverter to the power source, insert a recommended molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage
circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) in the path of power lines. Use the
devices within the related current range.
Use wires in the specified size.
Otherwise, fire could occur.
•
Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors.
•
Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
Doing so could cause fire.
•
Be sure to connect the grounding wires without fail.
•
Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.
•
Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power off.
Otherwise, electric shock or fire could occur.
•
Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
•
Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
•
Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the
number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be
connected.
Otherwise, fire or an accident could occur.
•
Do not connect the power source wires to output terminals (U, V, and W).
•
Do not connect a braking resistor to between terminals P (+) and N (-), P1 and N (-), P (+)
and P1, DB and N (-), or P1 and DB.
Doing so could cause fire or an accident.
2-6
2.3.5
Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals
Follow the procedure below. Figure 2.3 illustrates the wiring procedure with peripheral equipment.
Wiring procedure
c
d
e
f
g
h
Grounding terminal
G*1
Inverter output terminals (U, V, and W) and grounding terminal
G*1
DC reactor connection terminals (P1 and P(+))*2
Braking resistor connection terminals (P(+) and DB)*2
DC link bus terminals (P(+) and N(-))*2
Main circuit power input terminals (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T) or (L1/L and L2/N)
*1 Use either one of these two grounding terminals on the main circuit terminal block.
*2 Perform wiring as necessary.
CAUTION: The above is
an illustration. Do not
connect more than 2 wires
to terminal P (+).
CAUTION: When wiring the inverter to the
power supply of 500 kVA or more, be sure
to connect an optional DC reactor (DCR).
Figure 2.3 Wiring Procedure for Peripheral Equipment
2-7
The wiring procedure for the FRN0006C2S-2† is given below as an example. For other inverter
types, perform wiring in accordance with their individual terminal arrangement. (Refer to page 2-3.)
c
Grounding terminal ( G)
Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction. It is stipulated
by the Electric Facility Technical Standard that all metal frames of electrical equipment must be
grounded to avoid electric shock, fire and other disasters.
Grounding terminals should be grounded as follows:
1) Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
2) Connect a thick grounding wire with a large surface area. Keep the wiring length as short as
possible.
d
Inverter output terminals, U, V, W and grounding terminal ( G)
1) Connect the three wires of the three-phase motor to terminals U, V, and W, aligning phases each
other.
2) Connect the grounding wire of terminals U, V, and W to the grounding terminal ( G).
- The wiring length between the inverter and motor should not exceed 50 m. If it exceeds
50 m, it is recommended that an output circuit filter (option) be inserted.
- Do not use one multicore cable to connect several inverters with motors.
No output circuit filter inserted
Output circuit filter inserted
5 m or less
Power
supply
Power
supply
Motor
Inverter
Motor
Inverter
Output circuit filter
50 m or less
400 m or less
• Do not connect a phase-advancing capacitor or surge absorber to the inverter’s output
lines (secondary circuit).
• If the wiring length is long, the stray capacitance between the wires will increase,
resulting in an outflow of the leakage current. It will activate the overcurrent protection,
increase the leakage current, or will not assure the accuracy of the current display. In
the worst case, the inverter could be damaged.
• If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter, the wiring length should
be the total length of the wires to the motors.
2-8
Driving 400 V series motor
• If a thermal relay is installed in the path between the inverter and the motor to protect
the motor from overheating, the thermal relay may malfunction even with a wiring
length shorter than 50 m. In this situation, add an output circuit filter (option) or lower
the carrier frequency (Function code F26: Motor sound (Carrier frequency)).
• If the motor is driven by a PWM-type inverter, surge voltage that is generated by
switching the inverter component may be superimposed on the output voltage and
may be applied to the motor terminals. Particularly if the wiring length is long, the surge
voltage may deteriorate the insulation resistance of the motor. Consider any of the
following measures.
- Use a motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage. (All Fuji standard
motors feature insulation that withstands the surge voltage.)
- Connect an output circuit filter (option) to the output terminals (secondary circuits) of
the inverter.
- Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor (10 to 20 m or less).
e
DC reactor terminals, P1 and P (+)
1) Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P(+).
2) Connect a DC reactor (option) to terminals P1 and P(+).
• The wiring length should be 10 m or below.
• If both a DC reactor and a braking resistor are to be connected to the inverter, secure
both wires of the DC reactor and braking resistor together to terminal P(+). (Refer to
item f on the next page.)
• Do not remove the jumper bar if a DC reactor is not going to be used.
When wiring the inverter to the power supply of 500 kVA or more, be sure to connect an optional
DC reactor (DCR).
Otherwise, fire could occur.
Figure 2.4 Location of Jumper Bar
2-9
f
Braking resistor terminals, P(+) and DB
1) Connect terminals P and DB of a braking resistor (option) to terminals P(+) and DB on the main
circuit terminal block.
2) Arrange the inverter and braking resistor to keep the wiring length to 5 m or less and twist the two
wires or route them together in parallel.
Do not connect a braking resistor to any inverter of FRN0002C2S-2…/-7… or below. (Even
if connected, the braking resistor will not work.)
Never insert a braking resistor between terminals P(+) and N(-), P1 and N(-), P(+) and P1, DB
and N(-), or P1 and DB.
Doing so could cause fire.
When a DC reactor is not to be connected together with the braking resistor
1) Remove the screws from terminals P(+) and P1, together with the jumper bar.
2) Connect the wire from terminal P of the braking resistor to terminal P(+) of the inverter and put the
jumper bar back into place. Then secure the wire and jumper bar with the screw.
3) Tighten the screw of terminal P1 on the jumper bar.
4) Connect the wire from terminal DB of the braking resistor to the DB of the inverter.
When connecting a DC reactor together with the braking resistor
1) Remove the screw from terminal P(+).
2) Overlap the DC reactor wire and braking resistor wire (P) and then secure them to terminal P(+) of
the inverter with the screw.
3) Connect the wire from terminal DB of the braking resistor to terminal DB of the inverter.
4) Do not use the jumper bar.
g
DC link bus terminals, P (+) and N (-)
These are provided for the DC link bus powered system. Connect these terminals with terminals P(+)
and N (-) of other inverters.
Consult your Fuji Electric representative if these terminals are to be used.
2-10
h
Main circuit power input terminals, L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T (for three-phase voltage input)
or L1/L and L2/N (for single-phase voltage input)
1) For safety, make sure that the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or magnetic contactor (MC) is
turned off before wiring the main circuit power input terminals.
2) Connect the main circuit power supply wires (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T or L1/L and L2/N) to the input
terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth
leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)*, and MC if necessary.
It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter
with each other.
* With overcurrent protection
It is recommended that a magnetic contactor be inserted which can be manually activated.
This is to allow you to disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency (e.g.,
when the protective function is activated) so as to prevent a failure or accident from causing
the secondary problems.
2.3.6
Wiring for control circuit terminals
In general, sheaths and covers of the control signal cables and wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high electric field (i.e., reinforced insulation is not applied). Therefore, if a
control signal cable or wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit, the
insulation of the sheath or the cover might break down, which would expose the signal wire to a
high voltage of the main circuit. Make sure that the control signal cables and wires will not come
into contact with live conductors of the main circuit.
Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock and/or an accident.
Noise may be emitted from the inverter, motor and wires.
Implement appropriate measure to prevent the nearby sensors and devices from malfunctioning
due to such noise.
An accident could occur.
Table 2.8 lists the symbols, names and functions of the control circuit terminals. The wiring to the
control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes, which reflects the
use of the inverter.
Put back the main circuit terminal block cover and then connect wires to the control circuit terminals.
Route these wires correctly to reduce the influence of noise.
2-11
Classification
Table 2.8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals
Symbol
[13]
[12]
Name
Functions
Power
supply for
potentiometer
Power supply (+10 VDC) for an external frequency command potentiometer
(Potentiometer: 1 to 5 kΩ)
Analog
setting
voltage
input
(1) The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input
voltage.
A potentiometer of 1/2 W rating or more should be connected.
0 to +10 (VDC)/0 to 100 (%) (Normal operation)
+10 to 0 (VDC)/0 to 100 (%) (Inverse operation)
(2) Used for reference signal (PID process command) or PID feedback
signal.
(3) Used as additional auxiliary setting for various main frequency commands.
* Input impedance: 22 kΩ
* The allowable maximum input is +15 VDC; however, the voltage higher
than +10 VDC is treated as +10 VDC.
[C1]
Current
input
(1) The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input
current.
Analog input
+4 to +20 mA DC/0 to 100% (Normal operation)
+20 to +4 mA DC/0 to 100% (Inverse operation)
+0 to +20 mA DC/0 to 100% (Normal operation)
+20 to 0 mA DC/0 to 100% (Inverse operation)
(2) Used for reference signal (PID process command) or PID feedback
signal.
(3) Connects PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor for motor
protection.
(4) Used as additional auxiliary setting for various main frequency commands.
* Input impedance: 250Ω
* The allowable maximum input is +30 mA DC; however, the current
larger than +20 mA DC is treated as +20 mA DC.
[11]
Analog
common
Common terminal for analog input and output signals
This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals [CM] and [Y1E].
2-12
Classification
Table 2.8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Symbol
Name
Functions
- These low level analog signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects.
Route the wiring as short as possible (within 20 m) and use shielded wires. In principle,
ground the shielded sheath of wires; if effects of external inductive noises are considerable, connection to terminal [11] may be effective. As shown in Figure 2.5, ground
the single end of the shield to enhance the shield effect.
Analog input
- Use a twin-contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit.
Do not connect the relay's contact to terminal [11].
- When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting analog signals, the
external device may malfunction due to electric noise generated by the inverter. If this
happens, according to the circumstances, connect a ferrite core (a toroidal core or
equivalent) to the device outputting analog signals or connect a capacitor having the
good cut-off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown
in Figure 2.6.
- Do not apply a voltage of +7.5 VDC or higher to terminal [C1]. Doing so could damage
the internal control circuit.
Potentiometer
1 k to 5 kΩ
Figure 2.5 Connection of Shielded Wire
Figure 2.6 Example of Electric Noise Reduction
2-13
Symbol
Name
Functions
[X1]
Digital
input 1
[X2]
Digital
input 2
(1) The various signals such as "Coast to a stop," "Enable external alarm
trip," and "Select multistep frequency" can be assigned to terminals [X1]
to [X3], [FWD] and [REV] by setting function codes E01 to E03, E98, and
E99. For details, refer to Chapter 5, Section 5.2 "Details of Function
Codes."
[X3]
Digital
input 3
(2) Input mode, i.e. Sink/Source, is changeable by using the internal jumper
switch.
[FWD]
Run
forward
command
(3) Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the terminals between [X1]
to [X3], [FWD] or [REV], and [CM]. If the logic value for ON between [X1]
and [CM] is 1 in the normal logic system, for example, OFF is 1 in the
negative logic system and vice versa.
[REV]
Run
reverse
command
(4) The negative logic signaling cannot be applicable to [FWD] and [REV].
Digital input circuit specifications
Digital input
Classification
Table 2.8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Item
Min.
Operation ON level
voltage
OFF level
(SINK)
0V
2V
22 V
27 V
22 V
27 V
0V
2V
Operation ON level
voltage
(SOURCE) OFF level
Max.
Operation current at ON
2.5 mA 5 mA
(Input Voltage at 0 V)
Allowable leakage
current at OFF
[PLC]
[CM]
PLC
signal
power
Connects to PLC output signal power supply.
Digital
common
Common terminal for digital input signals
-
0.5 mA
Rated voltage: +24 VDC (Allowable range: +22 to +27 VDC), Max. 50 mA
This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals [11] and [Y1E].
2-14
Classification
Table 2.8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Symbol
Name
Functions
„ Using a relay contact to turn [X1], [X2], [X3], [FWD] or [REV] ON or OFF
Figure 2.7 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control signal
input [X1], [X2], [X3], [FWD] or [REV] ON or OFF. Circuit (a) has a connecting jumper
applied to SINK, whereas circuit (b) has one that is applied to SOURCE.
Note: To configure this kind of circuit, use a highly reliable relay.
(Recommended product: Fuji control relay Model HH54PW)
(b) With a jumper applied to SOURCE
(a) With a jumper applied to SINK
Digital input
Figure 2.7 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact
„ Using a programmable logic controller (PLC) to turn [X1], [X2], [X3], [FWD] or
[REV] ON or OFF
Figure 2.8 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller
(PLC) to turn control signal input [X1], [X2], [X3], [FWD] or [REV] ON or OFF. Circuit (a)
has a connecting jumper applied to SINK, whereas circuit (b) has one that is applied to
SOURCE.
In circuit (a) below, short-circuiting or opening the transistor's open collector circuit in the
PLC using an external power source turns control signal [X1], [X2], [X3], [FWD] or [REV]
ON or OFF. When using this type of circuit, observe the following:
- Connect the + node of the external power source (which should be isolated from the
PLC's power) to terminal [PLC] of the inverter.
- Do not connect terminal [CM] of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC.
(a) With a jumper applied to SINK
(b) With a jumper applied to SOURCE
Figure 2.8 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC
For details about the jumper setting, refer to Section 2.3.7 "Setting up the jumper switches."
2-15
Classification
Table 2.8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Symbol
[FMA]
Name
Analog
monitor
Functions
The monitor signal for analog DC voltage (0 to +10 VDC) is output. The
signal functions can be selected from the following with function code F31.
Analog output
-
Output frequency (before slip compensation)
Output frequency (after slip compensation)
Output current
- Output voltage
Input power
- PID feedback amount
DC link bus voltage
- Calibration
PID command (SV)
- PID output (MV)
*Input impedance of external device: Min. 5 kΩ
[11]
[Y1]
Analog
common
Common terminal for analog input and output signals
Transistor
output
(1) Various signals such as "Inverter running," "Frequency arrival signal"
and "Motor overload early warning" can be assigned to terminal [Y1] by
setting function code E20. Refer to Chapter 5, Section 5.2 "Details of
Function Codes."
This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals [CM] and [Y1E].
(2) Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the terminals between [Y1]
and [Y1E]. If the logic value for ON between [Y1] and [Y1E] is 1 in the
normal logic system, for example, OFF is 1 in the negative logic system
and vice versa.
Transistor output
Digital input circuit specification
Figure 2.9 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a
PLC.
- Check the polarity of the external power inputs.
- When connecting a control relay, first connect a
surge-absorbing diode across the coil of the relay.
[PLC]
Transistor
output
power
Power source of +24 VDC to be fed to the transistor output circuit load (50
mA at maximum).
To enable the source, it is necessary to short-circuit between terminals [Y1E]
and [CM].
Can also be used as a 24 VDC power source.
[Y1E]
Transistor
output
common
Common terminal for transistor output signal
This terminal is electrically Isolated from terminals [CM] and [11].
2-16
Classification
Table 2.8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Symbol
Name
Functions
„ Connecting programmable controller (PLC) to terminal [Y1]
Transistor output
Figure 2.9 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the
inverter’s control circuit and a PLC. In example (a), the input circuit of the PLC serves as
a sink for the control circuit, whereas in example (b), it serves as a source for the control
circuit.
Relay contact output
(a) PLC serving as sink
(b) PLC serving as source
Figure 2.9 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit
[30A],
[30B],
[30C]
Alarm
relay
output
(for any
fault)
(1) Outputs a contact signal (SPDT) when a protective function has been
activated to stop the motor.
Contact rating: 250 VAC 0.3A cos φ = 0.3
+48 VDC, 0.5A
(2) A command similar to terminal [Y1] can be selected for the transistor
output signal and use it for signal output.
(3) Switching of the normal/negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact outputs: "Terminals [30A] and [30C] are
short-circuited for ON signal output" or "Terminals [30B] and [30C] are
short-circuited (non-excite) for ON signal output."
(1) Used to connect an optional keypad to the inverter.
(2) Used to connect the inverter to a computer running FRENIC Loader via
the RS-485 communications link. (For the terminating resistor, refer to
Section 2.3.7.)
Communication
RJ-45 connector
(RS-485)
Figure 2.10 RJ-45 Connector and its Pin Assignment
* Pins 1, 2, 7 and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for an optional
keypad. When connecting any other device to the RJ-45 connector, do not
use those pins.
For the location of the RJ-45 connector, refer to Figure 2.11 "Locations
of Jumper Switches and RJ-45 Connector."
2-17
- Route the wiring of the control terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as
possible. Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions.
- Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of
the main circuit (such as the terminal block of the main circuit).
- The pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector on the FRENIC-Mini series is different from
that of the RJ-45 connector on the FVR-E11S series keypad. Do not connect them with
each other; doing so may cause a short-circuiting or collision of signal lines, resulting in
a broken inverter.
2.3.7
Setting up the jumper switches
Before changing the jumper switches, turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes. Make
sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a multimeter or a similar
instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between terminals P (+) and N (-) has dropped to the
safe level (+25 VDC or below).
An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual
electric charge in the DC link bus capacitor even after the power has been turned OFF.
Switching the jumper switches (shown in Figure 2.11) allows you to customize the specifications of
the digital I/O terminals and the RS-485 communication terminating resistor.
To access the jumper switches, remove the terminal block covers.
For details on how to remove the terminal block covers, refer to Section 2.3.1.
Table 2.9 lists function of each jumper switch.
Table 2.9 Function of Jumper Switches
Switch
1 SW1
Function
SINK/SOURCE switch for digital input terminals
• To use digital input terminals [X1] to [X3], [FWD] and [REV] in the SINK mode, set
a jumper in the sink position, to use them in the SOURCE mode, set a jumper in
the source position. (See Figure 2.11.)
• To switch between SINK and SOURCE modes, use a mini needle-nose pliers or
the similar tool to change the mounting position of the jumper.
2 SW3
Terminating resistor ON/OFF switch for RS-485 communication
• To connect an optional remote keypad, set a jumper in the OFF position (factory
default).
• If the inverter is connected to the RS-485 communications network as a terminating device, set a jumper in the ON position.
• To switch the terminating resistor ON and OFF, use a mini needle-nose pliers or
the similar tool to change the mounting position of the jumper.
2-18
Figure 2.11 shows the locations of jumper switches and the RJ-45 connector.
1
SINK
SOURCE
SW1
(Factory default for
(Factory default for
FRN_ _ _ _C2S-_A, C, U) FRN_ _ _ _C2S-_E)
2
ON
OFF
SW3
(Factory default for
all inverter types)
3
Figure 2.11 Locations of Jumper Switches and
RJ-45 Connector
2-19
RJ-45 connector
2.3.8
Cautions relating to harmonic component, noise, and leakage current
(1) Harmonic component
Input current to an inverter includes a harmonic component that may affect other motors and
phase-advancing capacitors on the same power supply line. If the harmonic component causes any
problems, connect a DC reactor (option) to the inverter. In some cases, it is necessary to insert a
reactor in series with the phase-advancing capacitors.
(2) Noise
If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices, or that generated from peripheral
equipment causes the inverter to malfunction, follow the basic measures outlined below.
1) If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding
wires:
- Isolate the grounded metal frames of the inverter from those of the other devices.
- Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires.
- Isolate the power system of the other devises from that of the inverter with an insulated
transformer.
2) If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices through power wires
or grounding wires:
- Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires.
- Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit and connect the pipe to the ground near the
inverter.
- Mount the inverter on the metal switchboard and connect the whole board to the ground.
- Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires.
3) When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment:
- For the control signal wires, use twisted or shielded-twisted wires. When using
shielded-twisted wires, connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of
the control circuit.
- Connect a surge absorber in parallel with a coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor.
(3) Leakage current
A high frequency current component generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs)
switching on/off inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitance of inverter
input and output wires or a motor. If any of the problems listed below occurs, take appropriate
measures against them.
Table 2.10 Leakage Current Countermeasures
Problem
An earth leakage circuit
breaker* that is connected
to the input (primary) side
has tripped.
*With overcurrent protection
An external thermal relay
was activated.
Measures
1) Decrease the carrier frequency.
2) Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter.
3) Use an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) with lower
sensitivity than the one currently used.
4) Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that features measures
against the high frequency current component (Fuji SG and
EG series).
1) Decrease the carrier frequency.
2) Increase the settling current of the thermal relay.
3) Use the electronic thermal overload protection built in the
inverter.
2-20
Chapter 3
OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
3.1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components
As shown in the figure at right, the
keypad consists of a four-digit
7-segment LED monitor, a potentiometer (POT), and six keys.
7-segment
Program/Reset key LED monitor
RUN key Potentiometer
The keypad allows you to start and
stop the motor, monitor running
status, configure the function code
data, check I/O signal states, and
display maintenance information and
alarm information.
Function/Data key
Down key
Up key
STOP key
Table 3.1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components
Monitor,
Potentiometer
and Keys
Functions
Four-digit, 7-segment LED monitor which displays the following according to the
operation modes *.
„ In Running mode:
Running status information (e.g., output frequency,
current, and voltage)
„ In Programming mode: Menus, function codes and their data
„ In Alarm mode:
Alarm code which identifies the error factor if the
protective function is activated.
Potentiometer (POT) which is used to manually set a reference frequency,
auxiliary frequencies 1 and 2 or PID process command.
RUN key. Press this key to run the motor.
STOP key. Press this key to stop the motor.
/
UP/DOWN keys. Press these keys to select the setting items and change the
function code data displayed on the LED monitor.
Program/Reset key which switches the operation modes* of the inverter.
„ In Running mode:
Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming mode.
„ In Programming mode: Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running
mode.
„ In Alarm mode:
Pressing this key after removing the error factor
switches the inverter to Running mode.
Function/Data key which switches the operation you want to do in each mode as
follows:
„ In Running mode:
Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the inverter (output
frequency, output current, output voltage, etc.).
„ In Programming mode: Pressing this key displays the function codes and sets
their data entered with the
and
keys or the
POT.
„ In Alarm mode:
Pressing this key displays detailed alarm information.
* FRENIC-Mini features three operation modes: Running, Programming, and Alarm. Refer to Section 3.2
"Overview of Operation Modes."
3-1
„ Simultaneous keying
Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time (expressed by "+"). FRENIC-Mini
supports simultaneous keying as listed below.
(For example, the expression "
key.)
+
keys" stands for pressing the
key while holding down the
Table 3.2 Simultaneous Keying
Operation mode
Running mode
Programming mode
Alarm mode
Simultaneous keying
+
keys
+
keys
+
keys
Used to:
Control entry to/exit from jogging operation.
Change certain function code data.
(Refer to function codes F00, H03, H45 and H97 in
Chapter 5 "FUNCTION CODES.")
Switch to Programming mode without clearing
alarms.
„ About changing of function code data
The function code data can be changed only when the data value displayed on the LED monitor is
flashing.
When the data value is lit, no change is allowed. To change the data, stop the inverter or disable the
data protection.
3.2 Overview of Operation Modes
FRENIC-Mini features the following three operation modes:
„ Running mode
: This mode allows you to enter run/stop commands in regular operation.
You can also monitor the running status in real time.
„ Programming mode : This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety
of information relating to the inverter status and maintenance.
„ Alarm mode
: If an alarm occurs, the inverter automatically enters the Alarm mode. In this
mode, you can view the corresponding alarm code* and its related information on the LED monitor.
* Alarm code: Indicates the cause of the alarm condition that has triggered the protective function. For
details, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.5 "Protective Functions."
Figure 3.1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes.
Figure 3.1 Status Transition between Operation Modes
3-2
Figure 3.2 illustrates the transition of the LED monitor screen during the Running mode, the transition between menu items in the Programming mode, and the transition between alarm codes at
different occurrences in the Alarm mode.
*1 In speed monitor, you can display any of the following according to the setting of function code E48:
Output frequency (Hz), Reference frequency (Hz), Load shaft speed (r/min), Line speed (m/min), and
Constant rate of feeding time (min).
*2 Applicable only when PID control is employed.
*3 Applicable only when timer operation is selected by the setting of function code C21.
*4 Applicable only when the remote keypad (option) is connected to the inverter.
*5 Alarm can be reset with the
key only when the current alarm code is displayed.
Figure 3.2 Transition between Basic Display Screens by Operation Mode
3-3
3.3 Running mode
When the inverter is turned on, it automatically enters Running mode. In Running mode, you can:
(1) Monitor the running status (e.g., output frequency, output current),
(2) Set up the reference frequency and PID process command, and
(3) Run/stop the motor.
3.3.1
Monitoring the running status
In Running mode, the nine items listed below can be monitored. Immediately after the inverter is
turned ON, the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed. Press the
key to switch
between these monitor items.
Table 3.3 Monitor Items
Monitor Items
Speed monitor
Display Sample
on the LED
monitor (Note 1)
Meaning of Displayed Value
Function
Code Data
for E43
Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED
monitor.
0
Output frequency (before slip
compensation) (Hz)
5*00
Pre-slip compensation frequency
(E48 = 0)
Output frequency (after slip
compensation) (Hz)
5*00
Frequency actually being output
(E48 = 1)
Reference frequency (Hz)
5*00
Final reference frequency
(E48 = 2)
Load shaft speed (r/min)
30*0
Output frequency (Hz) x E50
(E48 = 4)
Line speed (m/min)
30*0
Output frequency (Hz) x E50
(E48 = 5)
Constant feeding rate time
(min)
50
(E48 = 6)
Output current (A)
!90a
Current output from the inverter in RMS
Input power (kW)
*40p
Input power to the inverter
9
Output voltage (V) (Note 2)
200u
Voltage output from the inverter in RMS
4
PID command (Note 3)(Note 4)
1*0*
PID command/PID feedback amount transformed to the virtual physical value of the object
to be controlled
Refer to function codes E40 and E41.
PID feedback amount
(Note 3)(Note 5)
PID output (Note 3)(Note 4)
Timer (sec) (Note 3)
Input watt-hour
)0*
10**
50
10*0
3
10
12
PID output in %, assuming the maximum frequency (F03) as 100%
14
Remaining effective timer count
13
Display value =
25
(Note 1) A value 10000 or above cannot be displayed on the 4-digit LED monitor screen, so "
appears instead.
"
(Note 2) When the LED monitor displays an output voltage, the 7-segment letter u in the lowest digit
stands for the unit of the voltage "V."
(Note 3) These PID related items appear only under PID control (J01 = 1 or 2).
The timer (for timer operation) appears only when timer operation is enabled (C21 = 1).
When the PID control or timer operation is disabled, "----" appears instead.
(Note 4) When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount, the dot (decimal point)
attached to the lowest digit of the 7-segment letter blinks.
(Note 5) When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount, the dot (decimal point) attached to the
lowest digit of the 7-segment letter lights.
3-4
3.3.2
Setting up reference frequency and PID process command
You can set up the desired frequency command and PID process command by using the potentiand
keys on the keypad. You can also set up the reference frequency as freometer and
quency, load shaft speed, line speed, and constant rate of feeding time by setting function code E48.
„ Setting up the reference frequency
Using the built-in potentiometer (factory default)
Setting function code F01 to "4: Built-in potentiometer (POT)" (factory default) allows you to specify
the reference frequency using the potentiometer.
Using the
and
keys
(1) Set function code F01 to "0:
/
keys on the built-in keypad." In Programming mode or
/
keys cannot be used for setting the reference frequency, so switch to
Alarm mode, the
Running mode.
(2) Press the
or
key to display the reference frequency with the lowest digit blinking.
or
key again. The new setting will be
(3) To change the reference frequency, press the
automatically saved into the inverter’s memory. It is kept there even if the inverter is powered off,
and it will be used as the initial frequency next time the inverter is powered on.
• If you have set the function code F01 to "0:
/
keys on the built-in keypad" but have
selected a frequency setting other than frequency 1 (i.e., frequency 2, Via communications, or Multistep frequency), then the
or
key cannot be used for setting up the
reference frequency even if the keypad is in Running mode. Pressing either of these keys
will just display the currently selected reference frequency.
• When you start changing the reference frequency or any other parameter with the
or
key, the lowest digit on the display will blink and start changing. As you are holding the
key down, blinking will gradually move to the upper digit places and the upper digits will
be changeable.
• If you press the
or
key once and then hold down the
key for more than 1
second after the lowest digit starts blinking, blinking will move to the next upper digit place
to allow you to change the value of that digit (cursor movement). This way you can easily
change the values of the higher digits.
/
keys on the built-in keypad" and selecting
• By setting function code C30 to "0:
frequency set 2 as the frequency setting method, you can also specify or change the
reference frequency in the same manner using the
and
keys.
„ Setting up the PID process command
To enable PID control, you need to set function code J01 to "1" or "2."
Refer to the FRENIC-Mini User's Manual for details on the PID control.
3-5
Setting the PID process command with the built-in potentiometer
(1) Set function code E60 to "3: PID process command 1."
(2) Set function code J02 to "1: PID process command 1."
Setting the PID process command with the
(1) Set function code J02 to "0:
/
and
keys
keys on the built-in keypad."
(2) Set the LED monitor to an item other than the speed monitor (E43 = 0) in Running mode. In
/
keys cannot be used for setting the PID
Programming mode or Alarm mode, the
process command, so switch to Running mode.
(3) Press the
or
key to display the PID process command. The lowest digit of the displayed
command and the decimal point blink.
or
key again. The new PID process
(4) To change the PID process command, press the
command will be automatically saved into the inverter’s memory. It is kept there even if the
inverter is switched to any other PID process command entry method and then returned to the
keypad entry method. Also, it is kept there even if the inverter is powered off, and it will be used
as the initial PID process command next time the inverter is powered on.
• Even if multistep frequency is selected as a PID process command (SS4 = ON), you still
can set the process command using the keypad.
• When function code J02 data has been set to any value except "0," pressing the
or
key displays the currently selected PID process command but does not allow any
change of the setting.
• When a PID process command is displayed, the decimal point next to the lowest digit on
the LED display blinks to distinguish it from the regular frequency setting. When a PID
feedback amount is displayed, the decimal point is lit.
3-6
3.3.3
Running/stopping the motor
key starts
By factory default, pressing the
running the motor in the forward direction and
pressing the
key decelerates the motor to stop.
The
key is enabled only in Running mode.
By changing the setting of function code F02, you
can change the starting direction of motor rotation;
for example, you can have the motor start running
in the reverse direction or in accordance with the
wiring connection at the terminal block.
„ Operational relationship between function code F02 (Operation method) and
Table 3.4 lists the relationship between function code F02 settings and the
the motor rotation direction.
key
key, which determines
Table 3.4 Rotation Direction of Motor, Specified by F02
If Function code F02
is set to:
Pressing the
key
rotates the motor:
2
in the forward direction
3
in the reverse direction
(Note) The rotation direction of
IEC-compliant motors is opposite to the one shown here.
For the details of operation with function code F02 set to "0" or "1," refer to Chapter 5.
3-7
3.4 Programming mode
Programming mode provides you with these functions--setting and checking function code data,
monitoring maintenance information and checking input/output (I/O) signal status. The functions can
be easily selected with the menu-driven system. Table 3.5 lists menus available in Programming
mode. The leftmost digit (numerals) of each letter string indicates the corresponding menu number
and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents.
When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on, the menu that was selected
last in Programming mode will be displayed.
Table 3.5 Menus Available in Programming Mode
Menu #
#1
LED
monitor
shows:
Menu
Refer
to:
Main functions
!f__
F codes
(Fundamental functions)
!e__
E codes
(Extension terminal functions)
!c__
C codes
(Control functions of frequency)
!p__
P codes
(Motor 1 parameters)
!h__
H codes
(High performance functions)
!a__
A codes
(Motor 2 parameters)
!j__
J codes
(Application functions)
Selecting each of
these function
codes enables its
data to be displayed/changed.
Section
3.4.1
!y__
y codes (Link functions)
"Data setting"
#2
"Data checking"
"rep
Displays only function codes that have been
changed from their factory defaults. You may refer to
or change those function codes data.
Section
3.4.2
#3
"Drive monitoring"
#ope
Displays the running information required for maintenance or test running.
Section
3.4.3
#4
"I/O checking"
$i_o
Displays external interface information.
Section
3.4.4
#5
"Maintenance
information"
%che
Displays maintenance information including accumulated run time.
Section
3.4.5
#6
"Alarm information"
Displays the latest four alarm codes. You may refer
to the running information at the time when the alarm
occurred.
Section
3.4.6
#7
"Data copying"
&al
*
'cpy
Allows you to read or write function code data, as
well as verifying it.
--
*To use this function, a remote keypad (option) is required.
3-8
Figure 3.3 illustrates the menu transition in Programming mode.
* Displayed only when a remote keypad (option) is set up for use.
Figure 3.3 Menu Transition in Programming Mode
Limiting menus to be displayed
The menu-driven system has a limiter function (specified by function code E52) that limits menus to
be displayed for the purpose of simple operation. The factory default is to display Menu #1 "Data
setting" only, allowing no switching to any other menu.
Table 3.6 Function Code E52 – Keypad (Mode Selection)
Function code data (E52)
Menus selectable
0: Function code data editing mode
Menu #1 "Data setting" (factory default)
1: Function code data check mode
Menu #2 "Data checking"
2: Full-menu mode
Menu #1 through #6
Note: Menu #7 appears only when the remote keypad (option) is connected.
3-9
If the full-menu mode is selected, pressing the
or
key will cycle through the menus.
key, you can select the desired menu item. Once the entire menu has been
With the
cycled through, the display will return to the first menu item.
3.4.1
Setting up the function codes – "Data Setting"
Menu #1 "Data setting" in Programming mode allows you to set function codes for making the
inverter functions match your needs.
To set function codes in Menu #1 "Data setting," it is necessary to set function code E52 data to "0"
(Function code data editing mode) or "2" (Full-menu mode).
The table below lists the function codes available in the FRENIC-Mini. The function codes are
displayed on the LED monitor on the keypad as shown below.
ID number in each function code group
Function code group
Table 3.7 List of FRENIC-Mini Function Codes
Function code
group
Function code
Function
Description
F codes
F00 to F51
Fundamental functions
To be used for basic motor running.
E codes
E01 to E99
Extension terminal
functions
To be used to select the functions of the
control circuit terminals.
To be used to set functions related to
the LED monitor display.
C codes
C01 to C99
Control functions of
frequency
To be used to set application functions
related to frequency settings.
P codes
P02 to P99
Motor 1 parameters
To be used to set special parameters for
the motor capacity, etc.
H codes
H03 to H98
High performance
functions
To be used for high added value functions and complicated control, etc.
A codes
A01 to A52
Motor 2 parameters
To be used to set specific parameters
for the motor capacity, etc.
J codes
J01 to J72
Application functions
To be used for PID control and brake
signals.
y codes
y01 to y99
Link functions
To be used for communications
Refer to Chapter 5 "FUNCTION CODES" for details on the function codes.
3-10
Figure 3.4 shows the status transition for Menu #1 "Data setting."
Figure 3.4 "Data Setting" Status Transition
3-11
Basic key operation
This section gives a description of the basic key operation, following the example of the function
code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3.5.
This example shows you how to change function code F01 data from the factory default "Built-in
potentiometer (POT) (F01 = 4)" to "
/
keys on the built-in keypad (F01 = 0)."
(1) When the inverter is powered on, it automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the
key to switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) With the menu displayed, use the
this example, select !f__).
and
keys to select the desired function code group. (In
key to proceed to the function codes in the function code group selected in (2). (In
(3) Press the
this example, function code f 00 appears.)
Even if the function code list for a particular function code group is displayed, it is possible to
and
keys.
transfer the display to a different function code group using the
and
(4) Select the desired function code using the
example, select function code f 01.)
keys and press the
key. (In this
The data of this function code appears. (In this example, data "4" of f 01 appears.)
(5) Change the function code data using the
four times to change data 4 to 0.)
(6) Press the
and
keys. (In this example, press the
key
key to establish the function code data.
The saue appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter. The display
will return to the function code list, then move to the next function code. (In this example, f 02.)
key instead of the
key cancels the change made to the data. The data
Pressing the
reverts to the previous value, the display returns to the function code list, and the original function code reappears.
(7) Press the
key to return to the menu from the function code list.
<Cursor movement>
You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the
for 1 second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings.
3-12
key
Figure 3.5 Example of Function Code Data Changing Procedure
3.4.2
Checking changed function codes – "Data Checking"
Menu #2 "Data checking" in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been
changed. Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are
displayed on the LED monitor. You may refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary. Figure 3.6 shows the status transition diagram for "Data checking."
3-13
* Pressing the
key with the e 52 data displayed returns to f 01.
Figure 3.6 "Data Checking" Status Transition (When changes are made only to F01, F05, E52)
Basic key operation
The basic key operation is the same as for "Data setting."
To check function codes in Menu #2 "Data checking," it is necessary to set function code
E52 to "1" (Function code data check mode) or "2" (Full-menu mode).
For details, refer to "Limiting menus to be displayed" on page 3-9.
3-14
3.4.3
Monitoring the running status – "Drive Monitoring"
Menu #3 "Drive monitoring" is used to check the running status during maintenance and test running.
The display items for "Drive monitoring" are listed in Table 3.8. Figure 3.7 shows the status transition
diagram for "Drive monitoring."
Figure 3.7 "Drive Monitoring" Status Transition
3-15
Basic key operation
Before checking the running status on the drive monitor, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu
mode).
(1) When the inverter is powered on, it automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the
key to switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) With the menu displayed, use the
(3) Press the
(4) Use the
and
keys to select "Drive monitoring" (#ope ).
key to display the desired code in the monitoring item list (e.g. 3_00 ).
and
keys to select the desired monitoring item, then press the
key.
The running status information for the selected item appears.
(5) Press the
menu.
key to return to the monitoring item list. Press the
key again to return to the
Table 3.8 Drive Monitoring Display Items
LED
monitor
shows:
Contents
Unit
3_00
Output frequency
Hz
Output frequency before slip compensation
3_01
Output frequency
Hz
Output frequency after slip compensation
3_02
Output current
A
Present output current
3_03
Output voltage
V
Present output voltage
3_05
Reference
frequency
Hz
Present reference frequency
3_06
Running direction
N/A
Displays the running direction being outputted.
F: forward; R: reverse, – – – –: stop
3_07
Running status
N/A
Displays the running status in hex. format. Refer to "Displaying
running status" on the next page.
Description
The unit for load shaft speed is r/min and that for line speed is
m/min.
r/min
(m/min)
Display value = (Output frequency Hz before slip compensation)
× (Function code E50)
3_09
Load shaft speed
(line speed)
3_10
PID process
command
N/A
The command is displayed through the use of function code E40
and E41 data (PID display coefficients A and B).
Display value = (PID process command) × (Coefficient A - B) + B
If PID control is disabled, "– – – –" appears.
3_11
PID feedback
value
N/A
This value is displayed through the use of function code E40 and
E41 data (PID display coefficients A and B).
Display value = (PID feedback value) × (Coefficient A - B) + B
If PID control is disabled, "– – – –" appears.
appears for 10,000 (r/min or m/min) or more. When
is displayed, the data is overflowing, which means that the function code should be reviewed. For example:
Load shaft speed = Displayed data × 10 (r/min)
3-16
„ Displaying running status
To display the running status in hexadecimal format, each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as
listed in Table 3.9. Table 3.10 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and
the LED monitor display. Table 3.11 gives the conversion table from 4-bit binary to hexadecimal.
Table 3.9 Running Status Bit Allocation
Bit
Notation
15
BUSY
14
Content
Bit
Notation
7
VL
"1" under voltage limiting control.
Always "0."
6
TL
Always "0."
Always "0."
5
NUV
"1" when the DC link bus voltage is
higher than the undervoltage level.
WR
13
Content
"1" when function code data is
being written.
12
RL
"1" when communication is enabled (when ready for run and
frequency commands via communications link).
4
BRK
Always "0."
11
ALM
"1" when an alarm has occurred.
3
INT
"1" when the inverter output is shut
down.
10
DEC
"1" during deceleration.
2
EXT
"1" during DC braking.
9
ACC
"1" during acceleration.
1
REV
"1" during running in the reverse
direction.
8
IL
"1" under current limiting control.
0
FWD
"1" during running in the forward
direction.
Table 3.10 Running Status Display
LED No.
Bit
Notation
Binary
Hexadecimal
Example
LED4
15
(See Table
14
BUSY
1
13
WR
0
RL
0
8
LED3
12
0
11
10
LED2
9
ALM DEC ACC
0
0
1
3
8
7
6
IL
VL
TL
1
0
0
5
Hexadecimal
on the
LED
monitor
3-17
3
NUV BRK INT
1
2
3.11.)
LED1
4
0
0
2
1
0
EXT REV FWD
0
0
1
1
Hexadecimal expression
A 4-bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format (1 hexadecimal digit). Table 3.11
shows the correspondence between the two notations. The hexadecimals are shown as they appear
on the LED monitor.
Table 3.11 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion
Binary
Binary
Eight's
place
Four's
place
Two's
place
One's
place
Hexadecimal
Eight's
place
Four's
place
Two's
place
One's
place
Hexadecimal
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
9
0
0
1
0
2
1
0
1
0
a
0
0
1
1
3
1
0
1
1
b
0
1
0
0
4
1
1
0
0
c
0
1
0
1
5
1
1
0
1
d
0
1
1
0
6
1
1
1
0
e
0
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
1
f
3-18
3.4.4
Checking I/O signal status – "I/O Checking"
With Menu #4 "I/O checking," you can display the I/O status of external signals without using a
measuring instrument. External signals that can be displayed include digital I/O signals and analog
I/O signals. Table 3.12 lists check items available. The status transition for I/O checking is shown in
Figure 3.8.
Figure 3.8 "I/O Checking" Status Transition
3-19
Basic key operation
Before checking the status of the I/O signals, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode).
(1) When the inverter is powered on, it automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the
key to switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) With the menu displayed, use the
(3) Press the
(4) Use the
and
keys to select "I/O check" ($i_o ).
key to display the codes for the I/O check item list. (e.g. 4_00 )
and
keys to select the desired I/O check item, then press the
key.
The corresponding I/O check data appears. For control I/O signal terminal and control circuit
terminal input under communication control, use the
and
keys to select one of the two
different display methods.
(5) Press the
menu.
key to return to the I/O check item list. Press the
key again to return to the
Table 3.12 I/O Check Items
LED monitor
shows:
Contents
Description
4_00
I/O signals on the control
circuit terminals
Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals.
Refer to "Displaying control I/O signal terminals"
below for details on the display contents.
4_01
I/O signals on the control
circuit terminals under
communication control
Shows the ON/OFF state for the digital I/O terminals
that received a command via RS-485 communications. Refer to "Displaying control I/O signal terminals" and "Displaying control I/O signal terminals under communication control" below for details of the item displayed.
4_02
Input voltage on terminal [12]
Shows the input voltage on terminal [12] in volts (V).
4_03
Input current on terminal [C1]
Shows the input current on terminal [C1] in milliamperes (mA).
4_04
Output voltage to analog
meters [FMA]
Shows the output voltage on terminal [FMA] in volts
(V).
Displaying control I/O signal terminals
The status of control I/O signal terminals may be displayed with ON/OFF of the LED segment or in
hexadecimal display.
„ Display I/O signal status with ON/OFF of the LED segment
As shown in Table 3.13 and the figure below, each of the segments "a" to "e" on LED1 lights when
the corresponding digital input terminal ([FWD], [REV], [X1], [X2], or [X3]) is short-circuited with
terminal [CM] or [PLC]*, and does not light when it is open. Segment "a" on LED3 lights when the
circuit between output terminals [Y1] and [Y1E] is closed and does not light when the circuit is open.
Segment "a" on LED4 is for terminal [30ABC]. Segment "a" on LED4 lights when the circuit between
terminals [30C] and [30A] is short-circuited (ON) and does not light when it is open.
* Terminal [CM] if the jumper switch is set for SINK; terminal [PLC] if the jumper switch is set for SOURCE.
• If all terminal input signals are OFF (open), segment "g" on all of LEDs 1 to 4 will light
("– – – –").
• Refer to Chapter 5 "FUNCTION CODES" for details.
3-20
Table 3.13 Segment Display for External Signal Information
Segment
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
a
30ABC
Y1-Y1E
—
FWD-CM or
FWD-PLC *2
b
—
—
—
REV-CM or
REV-PLC *2
c
—
—
—
X1-CM or
X1-PLC *2
d
—
—
—
X2-CM or
X2-PLC *2
e
—
—
—
X3-CM or
X3-PLC *2
f
—
—
(XF) *1
g
—
—
(XR) *1
—
dp
—
—
(RST) *1
—
—
—: No corresponding control circuit terminal exists.
*1 (XF), (XR), and (RST) are assigned for communication. Refer to "Displaying control I/O signal
terminals under communication control" on the next page.
*2 Terminal [CM] if the jumper switch is set for SINK; terminal [PLC] if the jumper switch is set for SOURCE.
„ Displaying I/O signal status in hexadecimal format
Each I/O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3.14 An unassigned bit is
interpreted as "0." Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor in 4 hexadecimal digits ("0 " to
"f " each).
With the FRENIC-Mini, digital input terminals [FWD] and [REV] are assigned to bit 0 and bit 1,
respectively. Terminals [X1] through [X3] are assigned to bits 2 through 4. The bit is set to "1" when
the corresponding input terminal is short-circuited with terminal [CM] or terminal [PLC] *, and is set to
"0" when it is open. For example, when [FWD] and [X1] are on (short-circuited) and all the others are
off (open), "0005 " is displayed on LED4 to LED1.
* Terminal [CM] if the jumper switch is set for SINK; terminal [PLC] if the jumper switch is set for SOURCE.
Digital output terminal [Y1] is assigned to bit 0. Bit 0 is set to "1" when this terminal is short-circuited
with [Y1E], and to "0" when it is open. The status of the relay contact output terminal [30ABC] is
assigned to bit 8. It is set to "1" when the circuit between output terminals [30A] and [30C] is closed
and to "0" when the circuit between [30B] and [30C] is closed. For example, if [Y1] is on and [30A] is
connected to [30C], then "0101 " is displayed on the LED4 to LED1.
Table 3.14 presents an example of bit assignment and corresponding hexadecimal display on the
7-segment LED.
3-21
Table 3.14 Segment Display for I/O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Format
LED No.
Bit
Input
terminal
LED4
15
14
13
(RST)* (XR)* (XF)*
LED3
LED2
LED1
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X3
X2
2
1
0
X1 REV FWD
Output
terminal
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
30AC
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Y1
Binary
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Example
Hexadecimal
(See Table
0
0
0
5
3.11.)
Hexadecimal
on the
LED
monitor
– : No corresponding control terminal exists.
* (XF), (XR), and (RST) are assigned for communication. Refer to "Displaying control I/O signal terminals under communication control."
Displaying control I/O signal terminals under communication control
During control via communication, input commands sent through the RS-485 communications link
can be displayed in two ways: "display with ON/OFF of the LED segment" and "in hexadecimal
format." The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I/O signal terminal
status display; however, (XF), (XR), and (RST) are added as inputs. Note that under communications control, I/O display is in normal logic (using the original signals that are not inverted).
Refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448) for details on input commands
sent through the RS-485 communications link.
3-22
3.4.5
Reading maintenance information – "Maintenance Information"
Menu #5 "Maintenance information" in Programming mode contains information necessary for
performing maintenance on the inverter. Table 3.15 lists the maintenance information display items
and Figure 3.9 shows the status transition for maintenance information.
Figure 3.9 "Maintenance Information" Status Transition
Basic key operation
Before viewing maintenance information, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode).
(1) When the inverter is powered on, it automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the
key to switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) With the menu displayed, use the
(3) Press the
and
keys to select "Maintenance information" (%che ).
key to display the list of maintenance item codes (e.g. 5_00 ).
and
keys to select the desired maintenance item, then press the
(4) Use the
The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears.
(5) Press the
the menu.
key to return to the list of maintenance items. Press the
3-23
key.
key again to return to
Table 3.15 Maintenance Display Items
LED Monitor
shows:
Contents
Description
5_00
Cumulative run
time
Shows the cumulative power-ON time of the inverter.
Unit: 1,000 hours.
When the total ON-time is less than 10,000 hours (display: 0.001 to
9.999), data is shown in units of one hour.
When the total time is 10,000 hours or more (display: 10.00 to 65.53),
it is shown in units of 10 hours. When the total time exceeds 65535
hours, the display will be reset to "0" and the count will start again.
5_01
DC link bus
voltage
Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter.
Unit: V (volts)
5_03
Max. temperature
of heat sink
Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour.
Unit: ºC
5_04
Max. effective
current
Shows the maximum effective current for every hour.
Unit: A (amperes)
5_05
Capacitance of
the DC link bus
capacitor
Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor, based on
the capacitance when shipping as 100%. Refer to Chapter 7
"MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION" for details.
Unit: %
5_06
Cumulative run
time of electrolytic
capacitors on the
printed circuit
boards
Shows the cumulative time during which a voltage is applied to the
electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards.
Unit: 1,000 hours (Display range: 0.01 to 99.99)
When the count is less than 99,990 hours (Display: 0.01 to 99.99), it is
possible to check data in units of 10 hours (0.01).
When the count exceeds 99,990 hours, it stops and the LED monitor
sticks to 99.99.
Cumulative run
time of the
cooling fan
Shows the cumulative run time of the cooling fan.
If the cooling fan ON/OFF control (function code H06) is enabled, the
time when the fan is stopped is not counted.
Unit: 1,000 hours (Display range: 0.01 to 99.99)
When the count is less than 99,990 hours (Display: 0.01 to 99.99), it is
possible to check data in units of 10 hours (0.01).
When the count exceeds 99,990 hours, it stops and the LED monitor
sticks to 99.99.
Number of
startups
Shows the cumulative count of times the inverter is started up (i.e., the
number of run commands issued).
1.000 indicates 1,000 times. When any number ranging from 0.001 to
9.999 is displayed, the count increases by 0.001 per startup, and
when any number from 10.00 to 65.53 is displayed, the count increases by 0.01 every 10 startups.
If the count exceeds 65,535, it will be reset to "0" and start over again.
Input watt-hour
Shows the input watt-hour of the inverter.
Unit: 100 kWh (Display range: 0.001 to 9999)
Depending on the value of input watt-hour, the decimal point on the
LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors’ resolution
(Display resolution: 0.001 → 0.01 → 0.1 → 1).
To reset the integrated input watt-hour and its data, set function code
E51 to "0.000."
When the count exceeds 1,000,000 kWh, it will be reset to "0."
5_07
5_08
5_09
3-24
Table 3.15 Maintenance Display Items (Continued)
LED Monitor
shows:
Contents
Description
5_10
Input watt-hour
data
Shows the value expressed by "input watt-hour (kWh) × E51 (whose
data range is 0.000 to 9,999)."
Unit: None.
(Display range: 0.001 to 9999. The count cannot exceed 9999. It will
be fixed at 9,999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999.)
Depending on the value of integrated input watt-hour data, the
decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED
monitors’ resolution.
To reset the integrated input watt-hour data, set function code E51 to
"0.000."
5_11
No. of RS-485
errors
Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in RS-485
communication after the power is turned ON.
Once the count exceeds 9.999, it will be reset to "0."
5_12
RS-485 error
contents
Shows the latest error that has occurred in RS-485 communication in
decimal format.
For error contents, refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual
(MEH448).
5_14
Inverter's ROM
version
Shows the inverter's ROM version as a 4-digit code.
5_16
Keypad's ROM
version
Shows the keypad's ROM version as a 4-digit code. (Available only
when an optional remote keypad is connected.)
5_23
Cumulative run
time of motor
Shows the content of the cumulative run time of the motor.
The display method is the same as for "Cumulative run time" (5_00 ).
5_31
Remaining time
before the next
motor 1 maintenance
Shows the time remaining before the next maintenance, which is
estimated by subtracting the cumulative run time of motor 1 from the
maintenance interval specified by H78. (This function applies to motor
1 only.)
Display range: 0 to 9999 The x10 LED turns ON.
Time remaining before the next maintenance (hour) =
Displayed value × 10
Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
5_35
Remaining
startup times
before the next
maintenance
Shows the startup times remaining before the next maintenance,
which is estimated by subtracting the number of startups from the
preset startup count for maintenance specified by H79. (This function
applies to motor 1 only.)
The display method is the same as for 5_08 above.
Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
3-25
3.4.6
Reading alarm information – "Alarm Information"
Menu #6 "Alarm information" in Programming mode shows the causes of the past 4 alarms as an
alarm code. Further, it is also possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the
inverter when the alarm condition occurred. Figure 3.10 shows the status transition of the alarm
information and Table 3.16 lists the details of the alarm information.
Figure 3.10 "Alarm Information" Status Transition
3-26
Basic key operation
Before viewing alarm information, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode).
(1) When the inverter is powered on, it automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the
key to switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) With the menu displayed, use the
(3) Press the
and
keys to select "Alarm information" (&al ).
key to display the alarm list code (e.g. !0l1 ).
In the list of alarm codes, the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history.
(4) Each time the
or
key is pressed, the last 4 alarms are displayed in order from the most
recent one as ! , " , # , and $ .
key to have the corresponding alarm item
(5) While the alarm code is displayed, press the
number (e.g. 6_00 ) and data (e.g. Output frequency) displayed alternately in intervals of approximately 1 second. You can also have the item number (e.g. 6_01 ) and data (e.g. Output
and
keys.
current) for any other item displayed using the
(6) Press the
key to return to the alarm list. Press the
key again to return to the menu.
Table 3.16 Alarm Information Displayed
LED monitor
shows:
(item No.)
Contents
Description
6_00
Output frequency
Output frequency before slip compensation
6_01
Output current
Present output current
6_02
Output voltage
Present output voltage
6_03
Calculated torque
Calculated motor output torque
6_04
Reference frequency
Present reference frequency
6_05
Rotational direction
This shows the running direction being output.
f: forward; r: reverse; ----: stop
6_06
Running status
This shows the running status in hexadecimal. Refer to Displaying running status in Section 3.4.3 "Monitoring the running
status."
Cumulative run time
Shows the cumulative power-ON time of the inverter.
Unit: thousands of hours.
When the total ON-time is less than 10000 hours (display: 0.001
to 9.999), data is shown in units of one hour. When the total time
is 10000 hours or more (display: 10.00 to 65.53), it is shown in
units of 10 hours. When the total time exceeds 65535 hours, the
display will be reset to "0" and the count will start again.
6_08
No. of startups
The cumulative total number of times an inverter run command
has been issued is calculated and displayed.
1.000 indicates 1000 times. When any number ranging from
0.001 to 9.999 is displayed, the display increases by 0.001 per
startup, and when any number from 10.00 to 65.53 is displayed,
the display increases by 0.01 every 10 startups.
When the total number exceeds 65535, the counter will be reset
to "0" and start over again.
6_09
DC link bus voltage
Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter's main circuit.
Unit: V (volts)
6_07
3-27
Table 3.16 Alarm Information Displayed (Continued)
LED monitor
shows:
(item No.)
Contents
Description
Shows the temperature of the heat sink.
Unit: ºC
6_11
Max. temperature of
heat sink
6_12
Terminal I/O signal
status (displayed with
the ON/OFF of LED
segments)
6_13
Signal input terminal
status (in hexadecimal
format)
6_14
Terminal output signal
status (in hexadecimal
format)
6_15
No. of consecutive
occurrences
This is the number of times the same alarm occurs consecutively.
6_16
Overlapping alarm 1
Simultaneously occurring alarm codes (1)
(--- is displayed if no alarms have occurred.)
6_17
Overlapping alarm 2
Simultaneously occurring alarm codes (2)
(--- is displayed if no alarms have occurred.)
6_18
Terminal I/O signal
status under communication control
(displayed with the
ON/OFF of LED segments)
6_19
Terminal input signal
status under communication control
(in hexadecimal format)
6_20
Terminal output signal
status under communication control
(in hexadecimal format)
6_21
Error sub code
Secondary error code for the alarm.
6_22
Running status 2
Shows the running status 2 in hexadecimal format.
For details, see the next page.
6_24
Running status 3
Shows the running status 3 in hexadecimal format.
For details, see the next page.
Shows the ON/OFF status of the digital I/O terminals. Refer to
"Displaying control I/O signal terminals" in Section 3.4.4
"Checking I/O signal status" for details.
Shows the ON/OFF status of the digital I/O terminals under
RS-485 communication control. Refer to "Displaying control
I/O signal terminals under communication control" in Section 3.4.4 "Checking I/O signal status" for details.
When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession, the alarm information for the first
occurrence is retained and the information for the subsequent occurrences is discarded.
Only the number of consecutive occurrences will be updated.
3-28
Table 3.17 Running Status 2 (6_22 ) Bit Assignment
Bit
Content
Bit
Drive motor type
0: Induction motor,
1: Permanent magnet synchronous
motor (PMSM)
15
Content
7
14
6
13
5
12
4
(Not used.)
11
3
10
2
9
(Not used.)
Motor selection
00: Motor 1
01: Motor 2
Inverter drive control
0000: V/f control with slip compensation inactive
0001: Dynamic torque vector control
0010: V/f control with slip compensation active
1
Rotation direction limitation
0: Enable, 1: Disable
8
0
Table 3.18 Running Status 3 (6_24 ) Bit Assignment
Bit
Notation
15
-
14
13
12
Bit
Notation
(Not used.)
7
-
(Not used.)
ID2
Current detected 2
6
-
(Not used.)
IDL
Low current detected
5
OL
Motor overload early warning
Auto-restarting after momentary
power failure
ID
Content
Current detected
4
IPF
Content
11
OLP
Overload prevention control
3
SWM2
10
LIFE
Lifetime alarm
2
-
9
OH
Heat sink overheat early warning
1
FDT
Frequency detected
8
TRY
Auto-resetting
0
FAR
Frequency arrival signal
3-29
Motor 2 selected
(Not used.)
3.5 Alarm mode
When an abnormal condition occurs, the protective function is invoked to issue an alarm, and the
inverter automatically switches to Alarm mode and displays the corresponding alarm code on the
LED monitor.
„ Releasing the Alarm and Transferring the Inverter to Running Mode
Remove the cause of the alarm and press the
key to release the alarm and return to Running
mode. The alarm can be removed using the
key only when the current alarm code is displayed.
„ Displaying the Alarm History
It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed.
or
key while the current alarm code is
Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the
displayed.
„ Displaying the Status of Inverter at the Time of Alarm
If an alarm occurs, you can check various running status information (output frequency, output
key when the alarm code is displayed. The item number and data
current, etc.) by pressing the
for each running information is displayed in alternation.
Further, you can view various pieces of information on the status of the inverter using the
or
key. The information displayed is the same as for Menu #6 "Alarm information" in Programming
mode. Refer to Table 3.16 in Section 3.4.6 "Reading alarm information."
Pressing the
key while the status information is displayed returns the display to the alarm codes.
When the status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause, pressing the
key twice switches to the display of the alarm code and then releases the inverter from the
alarm state. If a run command has been received by this time, be careful since the motor
will start running.
„ Transit to Programming Mode
You can also go back to Programming mode by pressing the
alarm is displayed, and modify the setting of function codes.
3-30
+
keys simultaneously while the
Figure 3.11 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items.
Figure 3.11 Alarm Mode Status Transition
3-31
Chapter 4
RUNNING THE MOTOR
4.1 Test Run
4.1.1
Checking prior to powering on
Check the following prior to powering on the inverter.
(1) Check the wiring to the power input terminals (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T or L1/L and L2/N) and
inverter output terminals (U, V and W). Also check that the grounding wires are connected to the
grounding terminals correctly. See Figure 4.1.
• Do not connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U, V, and W. Otherwise, the
inverter may be broken if you turn the power ON.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes.
Otherwise, electric shock may occur.
(2) Check the control circuit terminals and main circuit
terminals for short circuits or ground faults.
(3) Check for loose terminals, connectors and screws.
(4) Check that the motor is separated from
mechanical equipment.
(5) Make sure that all switches of devices connected
to the inverter are turned OFF. (Powering on the
inverter with any of those switches being ON may
cause an unexpected motor operation.)
(6) Check that safety measures are taken against
runaway of the equipment, e.g., a defense to
prevent people from access to the equipment.
4.1.2
(E.g. Wire connection for three-phase
power supply)
Figure 4.1 Connection of Main Circuit
Terminals
Powering ON and checking
• Be sure to mount the terminal block covers before turning the power ON.
Do not remove any cover while powering on.
• Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Otherwise electric shock could occur.
Turn the power ON and check the following points. This is a
case when no function code data is changed from the
factory defaults.
(1) Check that the LED monitor displays *00 (indicating
that the frequency command is 0 Hz) that is blinking.
(See Figure 4.2.)
If the LED monitor displays any number except *00,
use the potentiometer to set *00.
(2) Check that the built-in cooling fan rotates.
(Inverters of FEN0010C2S-2…/7…, FRN0005C2S-4…
or below are not equipped with a cooling fan.)
4-1
Figure 4.2 Display of the LED Monitor
after Power-on
4.1.3
Preparation before a test run--Configuring function code data
Before running the motor, configure function code data specified in Table 4.1 in accordance with the
motor ratings and your system design values. The motor ratings are printed on the nameplate of the
motor. For your system design values, ask system designers about them.
• For details about how to change function code data, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.1 "Setting
the function codes – "Data Setting." Refer to the function code H03 in Chapter 5 "FUNCTION
CODES" for the factory defaults of motor parameters. If any of them is different from the
default setting, change the function code data.
• When using a PMSM, refer to Chapter 5, Section 5.3 "Notes in Driving PMSM."
Table 4.1 Settings of Function Code Data before a Test Run
Factory setting
Function
code
Name
Function code data
f 04 (a 02 ) Base frequency
f 05 (a 03 )
Motor parameter
(Rated capacity)
p 03 (a 17 )
Motor parameter
(Rated current)
Motor ratings
(printed on the
nameplate of the
motor)
f 07
Acceleration time
1*
f 08
Deceleration time
1*
EU
(E)
System design values
* For a test-driving of the
motor, increase values
so that they are longer
than your system
design values. If the
set time is short, the
inverter may not start
running the motor.
USA
(U)
50.0 (Hz)
60.0 (Hz)
0 (V)
230 (V)
0 (V)
460 (V)
Applicable motor rated capacity
Rated current of applicable motor
0: Motor characteristics 0
(Fuji standard 8-series
motors)
p 99 (a 39 ) Motor selection
Maximum
frequency
China
(C)
60.0 (Hz)
Rated voltage
at base frequency
p 02 (a 16 )
f 03 (a 01 )
Asia
(A)
60.0 (Hz)
1: Motor
characteri
stics 1
(HP rating
motors)
50.0
(Hz)
60.0 (Hz)
6.00 (s)
6.00 (s)
In any of the following cases, the default settings may not produce the best results for auto
torque boost, auto energy saving, automatic deceleration, auto search for idling motor
speed, slip compensation, or torque vector, since the standard settings of motor
parameters for Fuji motors are not applicable. Tune the motor parameters according to the
procedure given below.
• The motor to be driven is not a Fuji product or is a non-standard product.
• The cabling between the motor and the inverter is long.
• A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter.
A codes are used to specify the data for motor 2. Use them if necessary.
4-2
< Tuning procedure >
1) Preparation
Check the rating plate on the motor and set the following function codes to their nominal
ratings:
•
•
•
•
F04 and A02: Base frequency
F05 and A03: Rated voltage at base frequency
P02 and A16: Motor rated capacity
P03 and A17: Motor rated current
2) Selection of tuning process
Check the situation of the machine system and select either "Tuning while the motor is
stopped (P04 or A18 = 1)" or "Tuning while the motor is running (P04 or A18 = 2)." In the
case of "Tuning while the motor is running (P04 or A18 = 2)," also adjust the acceleration
and deceleration times (F07 and F08) and set the rotation direction properly so that it
matches the actual rotation direction of the machine system.
Data for
P04, A18
Motor parameters
subjected to tuning:
1
Primary resistance
(%R1) (P07, A21)
Leakage reactance
(%X) (P08, A22)
Tuning the %R1 and %X,
with the motor being
stopped.
The motor cannot be rotated
or 50% or more of the rated
load would be applied to the
motor if rotated.
2
Primary resistance
(%R1) (P07, A21)
Leakage reactance
(%X) (P08, A22)
No-load current
(P06, A20)
Rated slip frequency
(P12, A26)
Tuning the %R1 and %X,
with the motor being
stopped.
Tuning the no-load current,
with the motor running at
50% of the base frequency.
Even if the motor is rotated, it
is safe and no more than 50%
of the rated load would be
applied to the motor if rotated.
(Tuning with no load will
obtain the highest precision.)
Tuning type
Selection condition
of tuning type
Upon completion of the tuning, each motor parameter will be automatically saved into the
applicable function code.
3) Preparation of machine system
Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load, such as disengaging the
coupling and deactivating the safety device.
Switch to the motor 1 or motor 2, which the tuning is to be performed on.
Tuning results by P04 will be applied to P codes for the motor 1, and tuning results by A18
will be applied to A codes for the motor 2.
Assigning the SWM2 signal ("Switch to motor 2") to terminal [Y1] or [30A/B/C]
automatically switches the output status of SWM2 depending on the motor
selected for tuning.
4) Perform tuning
Set function code P04 or A18 to "1" or "2" and press the
on the LED monitor slows down.)
key. (The blinking of 1 or 2
Enter a run command for the rotation direction selected. The factory default is "
key
on the keypad for forward rotation." To switch to reverse rotation, change the data of
4-3
function code F02.
The display of 1 or 2 stays lit, and tuning starts with the motor stopped.
(Maximum tuning time: Approx. 40 s.)
If P04 or A18 = 2, the motor is accelerated to approximately 50% of the base frequency
and then tuning starts. Upon completion of measurements, the motor decelerates to a
stop.
(Estimated tuning time: Acceleration time + 20 s + Deceleration time)
Tuning continues with the motor stopped.
(Maximum tuning time: Approx. 10 s.)
If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command (F02 = 1), end
appears upon completion of the measurements.
The run command is turned OFF. (The run command given through the keypad or the
communications link is automatically turned OFF).
The tuning completes and the next function code p05 or a20 appears on the keypad.
„ Tuning errors
Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and, in the worst case,
could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision. Therefore, if the inverter finds any
abnormality in the tuning results or any error in the tuning process, it displays er7 and
discards the tuning data.
Listed below are possible causes that trigger tuning errors.
Possible tuning
error causes
Details
Error in tuning
results
- An interphase voltage unbalance has been detected.
- Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter.
Output current
error
An abnormally high current has flown during tuning.
Sequence error
During tuning, a run command has been turned OFF, or BX ("Coast to a
stop") or other similar terminal command has been received.
Error due to
limitation
- During tuning, any of the operation limiters has been activated.
- The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter (high) has limited tuning
operation.
Other errors
An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred.
If any of these errors has occurred, remove the error cause and perform tuning again, or
consult your Fuji Electric representative.
If a filter other than the optional Fuji output filter (OFL-………-4A) is connected
to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit, the tuning result cannot be assured.
When replacing the inverter connected with such a filter, make a note of the old
inverter’s settings for the primary resistance %R1, leakage reactance %X,
no-load current, and rated slip frequency, and specify those values to the new
inverter’s function codes.
4-4
4.1.4
Test run
If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this
Instruction Manual and the FRENIC-Mini User's Manual, the motor may rotate with a torque or at
a speed not permitted for the machine.
Accident or injury may result.
Follow the descriptions given in Section 4.1.1 "Checking prior to powering on" to Section 4.1.3
"Preparation before a test," then begin the test run of the motor.
If any abnormality is found in the inverter or motor, immediately stop operation and investigate
the cause referring to Chapter 6 "TROUBLESHOOTING."
------------------------------------------------ Test Run Procedure ------------------------------------------------(1) Turn the power ON and check that the reference frequency *00 Hz is blinking on the LED
monitor.
(2) Set a low reference frequency such as 5 Hz, using
blinking on the LED monitor.)
/
keys. (Check that the frequency is
key to start running the motor in the forward direction. (Check that the reference
(3) Press the
frequency is displayed on the LED monitor.)
(4) To stop the motor, press the
key.
< Check points during a test run >
• Check that the motor is running in the forward direction.
• Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration.
• Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration.
When no abnormality is found, press the
key again to start driving the motor, then increase the
/
keys. Check the above points again.
reference frequency using
If any problem is found, modify the function code data again as described below.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2 Operation
After confirming that the inverter normally drives the motor in a test run, make mechanical
connections (connections to the machine system) and electrical connections (wiring and cabling),
and configure the necessary function codes properly before starting a production run.
Depending on the production run conditions, further adjustments may be required, such
as adjustments of torque boost (F09, A05), acceleration time (F07, E10), and
deceleration time (F08, E11).
4-5
4.2.1
Jogging Operation
This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor.
Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below (The LED monitor should display jog .)
• Switch the inverter to Running mode (see page 3-3).
+
keys" simultaneously. The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for
• Press the "
approximately one second and then returns to jog again.
• Function codes C20 and H54 specify the jogging frequency and acceleration/
deceleration time for jogging, respectively. These function codes are exclusive to
jogging operation. Configure them as needed.
• Using the input terminal command JOG ("Ready for jogging") switches between the
normal operation state and ready-to-jog state.
• Switching between the normal operation state and read-to-jog state with the "
+
keys" is possible only when the inverter is stopped.
Jogging the motor
key during which the motor continues jogging. Releasing the key decelerates
Hold down the
the motor to a stop.
Exiting the ready-to-jog state and returning to the normal operation state
Press the "
+
keys" simultaneously.
4-6
Chapter 5
FUNCTION CODES
5.1 Function Code Tables
Function codes enable the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters to be set up to match your system
requirements.
Each function code consists of a 3-letter alphanumeric string. The first letter is an alphabet that
identifies its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the
group. The function codes are classified into eight groups: Fundamental Functions (F codes),
Extension Terminal Functions (E codes), Control Functions (C codes), Motor 1 Parameters (P
codes), High Performance Functions (H codes), Motor 2 Parameters (A codes), Application
Functions (J codes) and Link Functions (y codes). To determine the property of each function code,
set data to the function code.
The following descriptions supplement those given in the function code tables on page 5-3 and
subsequent pages.
„ Changing, validating, and saving function code data when the motor is running
Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when
the inverter is running:
Notation Change when running
Validating and saving function code data
Y*
Possible
If the data of the codes marked with Y* is changed, the change
will immediately take effect; however, the change is not saved
into the inverter's memory. To save the change, press the
key without pressing the
key to exit
key. If you press the
the current state, then the changed data will be discarded and
the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation.
Y
Possible
The data of the codes marked with Y can be changed with the
and
keys regardless of whether the motor is running or
not. Pressing the
key will make the change effective and
save it into the inverter's memory.
N
Impossible
—
„ Copying data
Connecting an optional remote keypad enables you to copy the function code data stored in the
inverter's memory into the keypad's memory (refer to Menu #7 "Data copying" in Programming
mode). With this feature, you can easily transfer all function code data saved in a source inverter to
other destination inverters.
If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ, some code data may not be copied
to ensure safe operation of your power system. Therefore, you need to set up the uncopied code
data individually as necessary. Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following
symbols in the "Data copy" column of the function code tables given below.
Y: Will be copied unconditionally.
Y1: Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter.
Y2: Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter.
N: Will not be copied. (Function codes marked with an "N" are not subject to Verify operation,
either.)
5-1
It is recommended that you set up those function codes which are not subject to the Copy operation
individually using Menu #1 "Data setting" as necessary.
Refer to the Remote Keypad Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-0843-E) for details.
„ Using negative logic for programmable I/O terminals
The negative logic signaling system can be used for digital input terminals and transistor output
terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals. Negative
logic refers to the inverted ON/OFF (logical value 1 (true)/0 (false)) state of input or output signal. An
active-ON signal (the function takes effect if the terminal is short-circuited.) in the normal logic
system is functionally equivalent to active-OFF signal (the function takes effect if the terminal is
opened.) in the negative logic system. An active-ON signal can be switched to active-OFF signal,
and vice versa, with the function code data setting.
To set the negative logic system for an input or output terminal, enter data of 1000s (by adding 1000
to the data for the normal logic) in the corresponding function code.
Example: "Coast to a stop" command BX assigned to any of digital input terminals [X1] to [X3] using
any of function codes E01 through E03.
Function code data
7
BX
Turning BX ON causes the motor to coast to a stop. (Active ON)
1007
Turning BX OFF causes the motor to coast to a stop. (Active OFF)
„ Limitation of data displayed on the LED monitor
Only four digits can be displayed on the 4-digit LED monitor. If you enter more than 4 digits of data
valid for a function code, any digits after the 4th digit of the set data will not be displayed; however
they will be processed correctly.
The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters.
F codes: Fundamental Functions
Code
F00
Name
Data Protection
Data setting range
0: Disable both data protection and digital
reference protection
IncreUnit
ment
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
–
–
Y
Y
0
–
–
N
Y
4
1: Enable data protection and disable digital
reference protection
2: Disable data protection and enable
digital reference protection
3: Enable both data protection and digital
reference protection
F01
Frequency Command 1
0: UP/DOWN keys on keypad
1: Voltage input to terminal [12] (0 to +10
VDC)
2: Current input to terminal [C1] (4 to 20 mA
DC)
3: Sum of voltage and current inputs to
terminals [12] and [C1]
4: Built-in potentiometer (POT)
7: Terminal command UP/DOWN control
5-2
5-21
Code
F02
Name
Data setting range
Operation Method
0: RUN/STOP keys on keypad (Motor
rotational direction specified by terminal
command FWD/REV)
IncreUnit
ment
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
–
–
N
Y
2
5-22
1: Terminal command FWD or REV
2: RUN/STOP keys on keypad (forward)
3: RUN/STOP keys on keypad (reverse)
F03
Maximum Frequency 1
25.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
N
Y
ACU:60.0 5-23
E:50.0
F04
Base Frequency 1
25.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
N
Y
AU:60.0
CE:50.0
F05
Rated Voltage at Base
Frequency 1
0: Output a voltage in proportion to input
voltage
1
V
N
Y2
ACE:0
U: 230/
460
80 to 240: Output an AVR-controlled
voltage (for 200 V class series)
160 to 500: Output an AVR-controlled
voltage (for 400 V class series)
F06
Maximum Output
Voltage 1
80 to 240: Output an AVR-controlled
voltage (for 200 V class series)
1
V
N
Y2
A: 220/
380
C: 200/
380
E: 230/
400
U: 230/
460
0.01
s
Y
Y
6.00
0.01
s
Y
Y
6.00
0.1
%
Y
Y
160 to 500: Output an AVR-controlled
voltage (for 400 V class series)
F07
Acceleration Time 1
0.00 to 3600
5-25
Note: Entering 0.00 cancels the acceleration
time, requiring external soft-start.
F08
Deceleration Time 1
0.00 to 3600
Note: Entering 0.00 cancels the deceleration
time, requiring external soft-start.
F09
Torque Boost 1
0.0 to 20.0
(percentage with respect to "F05: Rated
Voltage at Base Frequency 1")
Note: This setting takes effect when F37 = 0,
1, 3, or 4.
F10
Electronic Thermal
Overload Protection for
Motor 1
(Motor characteristics)
1: For a general-purpose motor and Fuji
standard permanent magnet
synchronous motor with shaft-driven
cooling fan
ACE:
5-26
See
Table
A.
U:0.0
–
–
Y
Y
1
5-28
0.01
A
Y
Y1
Y2
See
Table
A.
0.1
min
Y
Y
5.0
–
–
Y
Y
AC:1
EU:0
5-31
5-35
2: For an inverter-driven motor with
separately powered cooling fan
F11
F12
F14
(Overload detection
level)
(Thermal time constant)
0.00: Disable, 0.01 to 100.0
1 to 135% of the rated current (allowable
continuous drive current) of the motor
0.5 to 75.0
0: Disable restart (Trip immediately)
Restart Mode after
Momentary Power
Failure
1: Disable restart (Trip after a recovery from
power failure)
(Mode selection)
2: Trip after decelerate-to-stop *1
4: Enable restart (Restart at the frequency
at which the power failure occurred, for
general loads)
5: Enable restart (Restart at the starting
frequency)
F15
Frequency Limiter (High)
0.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
70.0
F16
(Low)
0.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
0.0
(Note) Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination: A (Asia), C (China), E (Europe), and U (USA).
*1 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
5-3
(F codes continued)
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
Name
F18
Bias
(Frequency command 1)
-100.00 to 100.00 *2
0.01
%
Y*
Y
0.00
5-36
F20
DC Braking 1
(Braking starting
frequency)
0.0 to 60.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
0.0
5-37
F21
(Braking level)
0 to 100
F22
(Braking time)
0.00 (Disable), 0.01 to 30.00
F23
F24
Data setting range
IncreUnit
ment
Code
Starting Frequency 1
(Holding time)
1
%
Y
Y
0
0.01
s
Y
Y
0.00
0.1 to 60.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
1.0
0.00 to 10.00
0.01
s
Y
Y
0.00
5-38
F25
Stop Frequency
0.1 to 60.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
F26
Motor Sound
(Carrier frequency)
0.75 to 16
1
kHz
Y
Y
0.2
F27
(Tone)
0: Level 0 (Inactive)
–
–
Y
Y
0
0 to 300
1
%
Y*
Y
100
Select a function to be monitored from the
followings.
–
–
Y
Y
0
–
–
N
Y
1
5-26
0.01
s
Y
Y
0.00
5-38
–
–
N
Y
0
5-41
ACU:2 5-39
E:15
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
3: Level 3
F30
Analog Output [FMA]
(Voltage adjustment)
F31
(Function)
5-40
0: Output frequency 1 (before slip
compensation)
1: Output frequency 2 (after slip
compensation)
2: Output current
3: Output voltage
6: Input power
7: PID feedback amount (PV)
9: DC link bus voltage
14: Calibration
15: PID command (SV)
16: PID output (MV)
F37
Load Selection/Auto
Torque Boost/
Auto Energy Saving
Operation 1
0: Variable torque load
1: Constant torque load
2: Auto-torque boost
3: Auto-energy saving operation (Variable
torque load during ACC/DEC)
4: Auto-energy saving operation (Constant
torque load during ACC/DEC)
5: Auto-energy saving operation
(Auto-torque boost during ACC/DEC)
F39
Stop Frequency
0.00 to 10.00
(Holding Time)
F42
Control Mode Selection
1
0: V/f control with slip compensation
inactive
1: Dynamic torque vector control
2: V/f control with slip compensation active
11: V/f control for PMSM drive *1
(Note) Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination: A (Asia), C (China), E (Europe), and U (USA).
*1 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
*2 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
5-4
(F codes continued)
Code
F43
Name
Data setting range
Current Limiter
(Mode selection)
F44
(Level)
F50
Electronic Thermal
Overload Protection for
Braking Resistor
F51
(Allowable average loss)
0:
Disable (No current limiter works.)
1:
Enable at constant speed (Disable
during ACC/DEC)
2:
Enable during ACC/constant speed
operation
IncreUnit
ment
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
–
–
Y
Y
2
20 to 180 (The data is interpreted as the
rated output current of the inverter for
100%.)
1
%
Y
Y
160
1 to 900, OFF (Cancel)
1
kWs
Y
Y1
Y2
OFF
0.001 kW
Y
Y1
Y2
0.001
(Discharging capability)
0.001 to 50.00
5-5
5-42
5-43
E codes: Extension Terminal Functions
Code
Name
IncreUnit
ment
Data setting range
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
E01
Terminal [X1] Function
Selecting function code data assigns the
corresponding function to terminals [X1] to
[X3] as listed below.
–
–
N
Y
0
E02
Terminal [X2] Function
0 (1000): Select multistep frequency (SS1)
–
–
N
Y
7
E03
Terminal [X3] Function
1 (1001): Select multistep frequency (SS2)
–
–
N
Y
8
5-44
2 (1002): Select multistep frequency (SS4)
3 (1003): Select multistep frequency (SS8)
4 (1004): Select ACC/DEC time
(RT1)
6 (1006): Enable 3-wire operation
(HLD)
7 (1007): Coast to a stop
8 (1008): Reset alarm
(BX)
(RST)
9 (1009): Enable external alarm trip (THR)
10 (1010): Ready for jogging
(JOG)
11 (1011): Select frequency command 2/1
(Hz2/Hz1)
12 (1012): Select motor 2/motor 1 (M2/M1)
13:
Enable DC braking
(DCBRK)
17 (1017): UP (Increase output frequency)
(UP)
18 (1018): DOWN (Decrease output
frequency)
(DOWN)
19 (1019): Enable data change with keypad
(WE-KP)
20 (1020): Cancel PID control
(Hz/PID)
21 (1021): Switch normal/inverse operation
(IVS)
24 (1024): Enable communications link
via RS-485
(LE)
33 (1033): Reset PID integral and
differential components
(PID-RST)
34 (1034): Hold PID integral component
(PID-HLD)
Setting the value in parentheses ( ) shown
above assigns a negative logic input
(Active-OFF) to a terminal.
Note that, in the case of THR, data "1009" is
for normal logic (Active-ON) and "9," for
negative logic (Active-OFF).
Signals having no value in parentheses ( )
cannot be used for negative logic.
E10
Acceleration Time 2
0.00 to 3600
Note: Entering 0.00 cancels the acceleration
time, requiring external soft-start and -stop.
0.01
s
Y
Y
6.00
E11
Deceleration Time 2
0.00 to 3600
Note: Entering 0.00 cancels the deceleration
time, requiring external soft-start and -stop.
0.01
s
Y
Y
6.00
5-6
5-25
(E codes continued)
Code
Name
IncreUnit
ment
Data setting range
E20
Terminal [Y1] Function
E27
Terminal [30A/B/C]
Function
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
–
–
N
Y
0
–
–
N
Y
99
0.0 to 10.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
2.5
5-56
0.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
ACU:60.0
E:50.0
–
0.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
1.0
0.00 (Disable), 0.01 to 100.0
0.01
A
Y
Y1
Y2
See
Table
A.
0.01
s
Y
Y
10.00
Selecting function code data assigns the
corresponding function to terminals [Y1] and
[30A/B/C] as listed below.
0 (1000): Inverter running
(RUN)
1 (1001): Frequency arrival signal
(FAR)
2 (1002): Frequency detected
(FDT)
3 (1003): Undervoltage detected
(Inverter stopped)
(LU)
5 (1005): Inverter output limiting
(IOL)
5-52
6 (1006): Auto-restarting after momentary
power failure
(IPF)
7 (1007): Motor overload early warning
(OL)
26 (1026): Auto-resetting
(TRY)
30 (1030): Service lifetime alarm
(LIFE)
35 (1035): Inverter running 2
(RUN2)
36 (1036): Overload prevention control
(OLP)
37 (1037): Current detected
38 (1038): Current detected 2
41 (1041): Low current detected
43 (1043): Under PID control
(ID)
(ID2)
(IDL)
(PID-CTL)
44 (1044): Motor stopped due to slow
flowrate under PID control
(PID-STP)
49 (1049): Switched to motor 2
(SWM2)
56 (1056): Motor overheat detected by
thermistor
(THM)
57 (1057): Brake signal
(BRKS)
59 (1059): Terminal [C1] wire break
(C1OFF)
84 (1084): Maintenance timer
(MNT)
87 (1087): Frequency arrival detected
(FARFDT)
99 (1099): Alarm output (for any alarm)
(ALM)
Setting the value in parentheses ( ) shown
above assigns a negative logic output to a
terminal.
E30
Frequency Arrival
(Hysteresis width)
E31
Frequency Detection
(Detection level)
E32
(Hysteresis width)
E34
Overload Early Warning/
Current Detection/Low
Current Detection
Current value of 1 to 200% of the inverter
rated current
5-57
(Level)
E35
(Timer)
0.01 to 600.00 *2
(Note) Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination: A (Asia), C (China), E (Europe), and U (USA).
*2 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
5-7
(E codes continued)
Code
E37
Name
Data setting range
Current Detection 2
(Level)
E38
(Timer)
0.00 (Disable), 0.01 to 100.0
IncreUnit
ment
0.01
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
A
Y
Y1
Y2
See
Table
A.
Current value of 1 to 200% of the inverter
rated current
5-57
0.01 to 600.00 *2
0.01
s
Y
Y
10.00
E39
Coefficient for Constant
Feeding Rate Time
0.000 to 9.999
0.001
–
Y
Y
0.000
5-58
E40
–
PID Display Coefficient
A
-999 to 0.00 to 9990 *3
0.01
–
Y
Y
100
E41
PID Display Coefficient
B
-999 to 0.00 to 9990 *3
0.01
–
Y
Y
0.00
E42
LED Display Filter
0.0 to 5.0
0.1
s
Y
Y
0.5
E43
LED Monitor
0: Speed monitor (select by E48)
–
–
Y
Y
0
–
–
Y
Y
0
(Display item)
3: Output current
4: Output voltage
9: Input power
10: PID command
12: PID feedback amount
13: Timer
14: PID output
25: Input watt-hour
E45
(Note)
E46
E47
E48
LED Monitor
(Speed monitor item)
0: Output frequency (Before slip
compensation)
1: Output frequency (After slip
compensation)
2: Reference frequency
4: Load shaft speed in r/min
5: Line speed in m/min
6: Constant feeding rate time
E50
Coefficient for Speed
Indication
0.01 to 200.00 *2
0.01
–
Y
Y
30.00
E51
Display Coefficient for
Input Watt-hour Data
0.000 (Cancel/reset), 0.001 to 9999
0.001
–
Y
Y
0.010
E52
Keypad
(Menu display mode)
0:
Function code data editing mode
(Menu #1)
–
–
Y
Y
0
1:
Function code data check mode
(Menu #2)
2:
Full-menu mode (Menus #0 through
#6)
5-58
5-59
(Note) E45, E46 and E47 appear on the LED monitor, but cannot be used by this inverter.
*2 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
*3 The significant figure is in three digits, so the incremental unit changes depending upon the magnitude of absolute values.
(Example) The incremental unit is "10" for 1000 to 9990, "1" for -999 to -100 and for 100 to 999, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and
for 10.0 to 99.9, and "0.01" for -9.99 to 9.99.
5-8
(E codes continued)
Code
E60
Name
Built-in Potentiometer
(Function selection)
IncreUnit
ment
Data setting range
0: None
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
1
–
N
Y
0
5-59
1: Auxiliary frequency command 1
2: Auxiliary frequency command 2
3: PID process command 1
E61
Terminal [12] Extended
Function
Selecting function code data assigns the
corresponding function to terminals [12] and
[C1] as listed below.
–
–
N
Y
0
E62
Terminal [C1] Extended
Function
0: None
–
–
N
Y
0
Selecting function code data assigns the
corresponding function to terminals [FWD]
and [REV] as listed below.
–
–
N
Y
98
0 (1000): Select multistep frequency (SS1)
–
–
N
Y
99
1: Auxiliary frequency command 1
2: Auxiliary frequency command 2
3: PID process command 1
5: PID feedback value
E98
Terminal [FWD] Function
E99
Terminal [REV] Function
1 (1001): Select multistep frequency (SS2)
2 (1002): Select multistep frequency (SS4)
3 (1003): Select multistep frequency (SS8)
4 (1004): Select ACC/DEC time
(RT1)
6 (1006): Enable 3-wire operation
(HLD)
7 (1007): Coast to a stop
8 (1008): Reset alarm
(BX)
(RST)
9 (1009): Enable external alarm trip (THR)
10 (1010): Ready for jogging
(JOG)
11 (1011): Select frequency command 2/1
(Hz2/Hz1)
12 (1012): Select motor 2/motor 1 (M2/M1)
13:
Enable DC braking
(DCBRK)
17 (1017): UP (Increase output frequency)
(UP)
18 (1018): DOWN (Decrease output
frequency)
(DOWN)
19 (1019): Enable data change with keypad
(WE-KP)
20 (1020): Cancel PID control
(Hz/PID)
21 (1021): Switch normal/inverse operation
(IVS)
24 (1024): Enable communications link
via RS-485
(LE)
33 (1033): Reset PID integral and
differential components
(PID-RST)
34 (1034): Hold PID integral component
(PID-HLD)
98:
Run forward
(FWD)
99:
Run reverse
(REV)
Setting the value in parentheses ( ) shown
above assigns a negative logic input
(Active-OFF) to a terminal.
Note that, in the case of THR, data "1009" is
for normal logic (Active-ON) and "9," for
negative logic (Active-OFF).
Signals having no value in parentheses ( )
cannot be used for negative logic.
5-9
`
5-44
C codes: Control Functions
Code
Name
Data setting range
C01
Jump Frequency 1
C02
2
C03
C04
0.0 to 400.0
IncreUnit
ment
0.1
Hz
3
(Hysteresis width)
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
Y
Y
0.0
Y
Y
0.0
Y
Y
0.0
0.0 to 30.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
3.0
0.00 to 400.00 *2
0.01
Hz
C05
Multistep Frequency 1
Y
Y
0.00
C06
2
Y
Y
0.00
C07
3
Y
Y
0.00
C08
4
Y
Y
0.00
C09
5
Y
Y
0.00
C10
6
Y
Y
0.00
C11
7
Y
Y
0.00
C12
8
Y
Y
0.00
C13
9
Y
Y
0.00
C14
10
Y
Y
0.00
C15
11
Y
Y
0.00
C16
12
Y
Y
0.00
C17
13
Y
Y
0.00
C18
14
Y
Y
0.00
C19
15
Y
Y
0.00
C20
Jogging Frequency
0.00 to 400.00 *2
C21
Timer Operation
0: Disable
–
0.01
Hz
Y
Y
0.00
–
–
N
Y
0
5-60
–
–
N
Y
2
5-21
0.00 to 200.00 *2
0.01
%
Y*
Y
100.0
5-36
0.00 to 5.00
0.01
s
Y
Y
0.05
5-60
1: Enable
C30
Frequency Command 2
0: UP/DOWN keys on keypad
1: Voltage input to terminal [12] (0 to +10
VDC)
2: Current input to terminal [C1] (4 to 20 mA
DC)
3: Sum of voltage and current inputs to
terminals [12] and [C1]
4: Built-in potentiometer (POT)
7: Terminal command UP/DOWN control
C32
Analog Input Adjustment
for Terminal [12] (Gain)
C33
(Filter time constant)
C34
(Gain base point)
0.00 to 100.00 *2
0.01
%
Y*
Y
100.00 5-36
C37
Analog Input Adjustment
for Terminal [C1] (Gain)
0.00 to 200.00 *2
0.01
%
Y*
Y
100.00
C38
(Filter time constant)
0.00 to 5.00
0.01
s
Y
Y
C39
(Gain base point)
0.00 to 100.00 *2
0.01
%
Y*
Y
–
–
N
Y
0
–
5-36
C40
C50
0.05
5-60
100.00 5-36
Terminal [C1] Input
Range Selection
0: 4 to 20 mA
Bias
(Frequency command 1)
0.00 to 100.00 *2
0.01
%
Y*
Y
0.00
-100.00 to 100.00 *2
0.01
%
Y*
Y
0.00
0.00 to 100.00 *2
0.01
%
Y*
Y
0.00
1: 0 to 20 mA
(Bias base point)
C51
Bias (PID command 1)
(Bias value)
C52
(Bias base point)
–
*2 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
5-10
(C codes continued)
Code
Name
Data setting range
C94
Jump Frequency 4
C95
5
C96
C99
*1
0.0 to 400.0
IncreUnit
ment
0.1
Hz
6
Digital Reference
Frequency
0.00 to 400.00
0.01
Hz
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
Y
Y
0.0
Y
Y
0.0
Y
Y
0.0
–
Y
0.00
–
*1
P codes: Motor 1 Parameters
Code
P02
Name
Data setting range
Motor 1
(Rated capacity)
IncreUnit
ment
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
0.01
0.01
kW
HP
N
Y1
Y2
5-61
See
Table A.
0.01
A
N
Y1
Y2
Rated
value of
Fuji
standard
motor
–
–
N
N
0
0.00 to 50.00
0.01
A
N
Y1
Y2
Rated
value of
Fuji
standard
motor
0.01 to 30.00
(kW when P99 = 0, 3, 4, 20 or 21)
0.01 to 30.00 (HP when P99 = 1)
P03
(Rated current)
P04
(Auto-tuning)
0.00 to 100.0
0: Disable
1: Tune when the motor stops (%R1, %X)
2: Tune when the motor is rotating under V/f
control (%R1, %X, no-load current, slip
frequency).
P06
(No-load current)
P07
(%R1)
0.00 to 50.00
0.01
%
Y
Y1
Y2
P08
(%X)
0.00 to 50.00
0.01
%
Y
Y1
Y2
P09
(Slip compensation gain
for driving)
0.0 to 200.0
0.1
%
Y*
Y
100.0
P10
(Slip compensation
response time)
0.01 to 10.00
0.01
s
Y
Y1
Y2
1.00
P11
(Slip compensation gain
for braking)
0.0 to 200.0
0.1
%
Y*
Y
100.0
P12
(Rated slip frequency)
0.00 to 15.00
0.01
Hz
N
Y1
Y2
0.00 (Disable PMSM),
0.01 to 50.00
0.01
Ω
Y
Y1
Y2
0.00
P60
Permanent magnet
synchronous motor *1
Rated 5-61
value of
Fuji
standard
motor
(Armature resistance)
P61
(d-axis inductance)
0.00 (Disable high-efficiency control),
0.01 to 500.0
0.01
mH
Y
Y1
Y2
0.00
P62
(q-axis inductance)
0.00 (Disable PMSM),
0.01 to 500.0
0.01
mH
Y
Y1
Y2
0.00
*1 The PMSM drive is available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
5-11
5-62
–
(P codes continued)
Code
P63
Name
Permanent magnet
synchronous motor *1
(Induced voltage)
Data setting range
0 (Disable PMSM),
IncreUnit
ment
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
1
V
N
Y2
0
160 to 500 (for 400 V class series)
P74
(Reference current at
starting)
10 to 200
1
%
Y
Y1
Y2
80
P89
(Control switching level)
10 to 100
1
%
Y
Y1
Y2
10
P90
(Overcurrent protection
level)
0.01
A
Y
Y1
Y2
0.00
P91 (d-axis compensation gain 0.0 to 25.0, 999 (Table value)
under damping control)
0.1
–
Y
Y1
Y2
999
P92
(q-axis compensation
gain under damping
control)
0.0 to 25.0, 999 (Table value)
0.1
–
Y
Y1
Y2
999
P93
(Step-out detection
current level)
0.0 to 100, 999 (Table value)
1
%
Y
Y1
Y2
999
0: Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard IM,
8-series)
–
–
N
Y1
Y2
0
P99
Motor 1 Selection
–
80 to 240 (for 200 V class series)
0.00 (Disable),
0.01 to 100.0
1: Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating IM)
3: Motor characteristics 3 (Fuji standard IM,
6-series)
4: Other motors (IM)
20: Other motors (PMSM)
21: Fuji standard PMSM without sensor
*1 The PMSM drive is available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
5-12
5-63
H codes: High Performance Functions
Code
H03
Name
Data setting range
Data Initialization
0: Disable initialization
IncreUnit
ment
–
–
Change
Refer
Data Default
when
to
copying setting
running
page:
N
N
0
5-64
5-70
1: Initialize all function code data to the
factory defaults
2: Initialize motor 1 parameters
3: Initialize motor 2 parameters
H04
H05
Auto-reset
(Times)
(Reset interval)
0 (Disable), 1 to 10
0.5 to 20.0
1
times
Y
Y
0
0.1
s
Y
Y
5.0
H06
Cooling Fan ON/OFF
Control
0: Disable (Cooling fan always ON)
1: Enable (ON/OFF control effective)
–
–
Y
Y
0
5-71
H07
Acceleration/
Deceleration Pattern
0: Linear
1: S-curve (Weak)
–
–
Y
Y
0
–
–
N
Y
0
–
2: S-curve (Strong)
3: Curvilinear
H08
Rotational Direction
Limitation
0: Disable
1: Enable (Reverse rotation inhibited)
2: Enable (Forward rotation inhibited)
H11
Deceleration Mode
0: Normal deceleration
1: Coast-to-stop
–
–
Y
Y
0
5-72
H12
Instantaneous
Overcurrent Limiting
0: Disable
1: Enable
–
–
Y
Y
1
5-73
H13
Restart Mode after
Momentary Power
Failure
(Restart time)
0.1 to 10.0
0.1
s
Y
Y1
Y2
0.5
5-31
H14
(Frequency fall rate)
0.00 (Deceleration time selected)
0.01 Hz/s
Y
Y
999
(Mode selection)
0.01 to 100.00
999 (Depends upon current limiter)
H15
(Continuous running
level) *1
H26
Thermistor for Motor
(Mode selection)
H27
H30
(Level)
Communications Link
Function
(Mode selection)
200 to 300 (for 200 V class series)
400 to 600 (for 400 V class series)
1
V
Y
Y2
235
470
0: Disable
1: Enable (With PTC, the inverter
immediately trips with 0h4 displayed.)
2 Enable (With PTC, the inverter issues
output signal THM and continues to run.
–
–
Y
Y
0
0.01
V
Y
Y
0.16
–
–
Y
Y
0
0.00 to 5.00
Frequency command Run command
0: F01/C30
1: RS-485
F02
F02
2: F01/C30
3: RS-485
RS-485
RS-485
–
H42
Capacitance of DC Link
Bus Capacitor
Indication for replacement of DC link bus
capacitor (0000 to FFFF in hex.)
1
–
Y
N
–
H43
Cumulative Run Time of
Cooling Fan
Indication for replacement of cooling fan
(0 to 9999, in units of 10 hours)
1
10h
Y
N
–
H44
Startup Counter of Motor
1
Indication of cumulative startup count
(0000 to FFFF in hex.)
–
–
Y
N
–
H45
Mock Alarm
0: Disable
–
–
Y
N
0
5-74
–
1: Enable (Once a mock alarm occurs, the
data automatically returns to 0.)
H47
Initial Capacitance of DC
Link Bus Capacitor
Indication for replacement of DC link bus
capacitor (0000 to FFFF in hex.)
1
–
Y
N
–
H48
Cumulative Run Time of
Capacitors on Printed
Circuit Boards
Indication for replacement of capacitors on
printed circuit boards
(0 to 9999, in units of 10 hours)
1
10h
Y
N
–
*1 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
5-13
(H codes continued)
Code
Name
Data setting range
H50
Non-linear V/f Pattern 1
0.0 (Cancel), 0.1 to 400.0
IncreUnit
ment
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
0.1
Hz
N
Y
0.0
5-23
1
V
N
Y2
ACE:0
U: 230/
460
0.1
Hz
N
Y
0.0
1
V
N
Y2
0
0.01
s
Y
Y
6.00
–
–
N
Y
1
–
–
Y
Y
0
5-35
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
2.0
–
–
–
Y
Y
0
5-74
Y
Y
999
5-75
(Frequency)
H51
(Voltage)
0 to 240: Output an AVR-controlled voltage
(for 200 V class series)
0 to 500: Output an AVR-controlled voltage
(for 400 V class series)
H52
Non-linear V/f Pattern 2
0.0 (Cancel), 0.1 to 400.0
(Frequency)
H53
(Voltage)
0 to 240: Output an AVR-controlled voltage
(for 200 V class series)
0 to 500: Output an AVR-controlled voltage
(for 400 V class series)
H54
ACC/DEC Time
0.00 to 3600
–
(Jogging operation)
H61
H63
UP/DOWN Control
0: 0.00
(Initial frequency setting)
1: Last UP/DOWN command value on
releasing a run command
Low Limiter
0: Limit by F16 (Frequency limiter: Low)
and continue to run
(Mode selection)
1: If the output frequency lowers below the
one limited by F16 (Frequency limiter:
Low), decelerate to stop the motor.
H64
H69
(Lower limiting
frequency)
Automatic Deceleration
0.0 (Depends on F16 (Frequency limiter:
Low))
0.1 to 60.0
0: Disable
(Anti-regenerative
control)
1: Enable (Lengthen the deceleration time
to three times the specified time under
voltage limiting control.) (Compatible with
the original FRENIC-Mini series
FRN………C1…-……)
(Mode selection)
2: Enable (Torque limit control: Cancel the
anti-regenerative control if the actual
deceleration time exceeds three times
the specified one.)
4: Enable (Torque limit control: Disable
force-to-stop processing.)
H70
Overload Prevention
Control
0.00: Follow deceleration time specified by
F08/E11
0.01 Hz/s
0.01 to 100.0, 999 (Cancel)
H71
H76
Deceleration
Characteristics
0: Disable
Automatic Deceleration
0.0 to 400.0
–
–
Y
Y
0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
5.0
5-74
–
1: Enable
(Frequency increment
limit for braking)
H78
Maintenance Interval *1
0: Disable,
1 to 9999 (in units of 10 hours)
1
–
Y
N
8760
H79
Preset Startup Count for
Maintenance
*1
0000: Disable,
0001 to FFFF (hex.)
1
–
Y
N
0000
H80
Output Current
Fluctuation Damping
Gain for Motor 1
0.00 to 0.40
0.01
–
Y
Y
0.20
(Note) Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination: A (Asia), C (China), E (Europe), and U (USA).
*1 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
5-14
(H codes continued)
Code
H89
Name
Data setting range
Electronic Thermal
Overload Protection for
Motor
0: Disable
IncreUnit
ment
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
–
–
Y
Y
1
0.1
s
Y
Y
0.0
–
1: Enable
(Data retention)
H91
H92
0.0: Disable alarm detection
PID Feedback Wire
Break Detection
(Terminal [C1])
0.1 to 60.0: After the specified time, cause
alarm
(P)
0.000 to 10.000 times; 999
0.001 times
Y
Y1
Y2
999
H93
(I)
0.010 to 10.000 s; 999
0.001
s
Y
Y1
Y2
999
H94
Cumulative Run Time of
Motor 1
0 to 9999 (in units of 10 hours)
–
–
N
N
–
5-76
H95
DC Braking
0: Slow
–
–
Y
Y
0
5-37
–
–
Y
Y
ACE:0
U:3
–
–
–
Y
N
0
5-74
–
–
Y
Y
19
5-76
Continuity of
Running *1
(Braking response
mode)
H96
H97
STOP Key Priority/Start
Check Function
Clear Alarm Data
1: Quick
Data STOP key priority Start check function
0:
Disable
Disable
1:
Enable
Disable
2:
Disable
Enable
3:
Enable
Enable
0: Disable
1: Clear alarm data
H98
Protection/Maintenance
Function
(Mode selection)
Bit 0: Lower the carrier frequency
automatically (0: Disable; 1: Enable)
Bit 1: Detect input phase loss
(0: Disable; 1: Enable)
Bit 2: Detect output phase loss
(0: Disable; 1: Enable)
Bit 3: Select life judgment threshold of DC
link bus capacitor
(0: Factory default level;
1: User setup level)
Bit 4: Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor
(0: Disable; 1: Enable)
(Note) Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination: A (Asia), C (China), E (Europe), and U (USA).
*1 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
5-15
A codes: Motor 2 Parameters
Code
Name
Data setting range
IncreUnit
ment
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
A01
Maximum Frequency 2
25.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
N
Y
ACU:60.0
E:50.0
A02
Base Frequency 2
25.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
N
Y
AU:60.0
CE:50.0
A03
Rated Voltage at Base
Frequency 2
0: Output a voltage in proportion to input
voltage
1
V
N
Y2
ACE:0
U: 230/
460
80 to 240V: Output an AVR-controlled
voltage (for 200 V class series)
160 to 500V: Output an AVR-controlled
voltage (for 400 V class series)
A04
Maximum Output
Voltage 2
1
V
N
Y2
A: 220/
380
C: 200
380
E: 230/
400
U: 230/
460
0.1
%
Y
Y
See
Table
A.
–
–
Y
Y
1
0.00 (Disable), 0.01 to 100.0
1 to 135% of the rated current (allowable
continuous drive current) of the motor
0.01
A
Y
Y1
Y2
See
Table
A.
0.5 to 75.0
0.1
min
Y
Y
5.0
0.0 to 60.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
0.0
80 to 240V: Output an AVR-controlled
voltage (for 200 V class series)
160 to 500V: Output an AVR-controlled
voltage (for 400 V class series)
A05
Torque Boost 2
0.0% to 20.0%
(percentage with respect to "A03: Rated
Voltage at Base Frequency 2")
A06
Electronic Thermal
Overload Protection for
Motor 2
1: For a general-purpose motor with
shaft-driven cooling fan
(Motor characteristics)
A07
A08
A09
(Overload detection
level)
(Thermal time constant)
DC Braking 2
2: For an inverter-driven motor with
separately powered cooling fan
(Braking starting
frequency)
A10
(Braking level)
0 to 100
1
%
Y
Y
0
A11
(Braking time)
0.00 : Disable
0.01 to 30.00
0.01
s
Y
Y
0.00
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
1.0
–
–
N
Y
1
–
–
N
Y
0
0.01 to 30.00 (kW when A39 = 0, 3, or 4)
0.01 to 30.00 (HP when A39 = 1)
0.01
0.01
kW
HP
N
Y1
Y2
See
Table
A.
0.00 to 100.0
0.01
A
N
Y1
Y2
Rated
value of
Fuji
standard
motor
A12
Starting Frequency 2
0.1 to 60.0
A13
Load Selection/
Auto Torque Boost/
Auto Energy Saving
Operation 2
0: Variable torque load
1: Constant torque load
2: Auto-torque boost
3: Auto-energy saving operation (Variable
torque load during ACC/DEC)
4: Auto-energy saving operation (Constant
torque load during ACC/DEC)
5: Auto-energy saving operation
(Auto-torque boost during ACC/DEC)
A14
Control Mode Selection
2
0: V/f control with slip compensation
inactive
1: Dynamic torque vector control
2: V/f control with slip compensation active
A16
Motor 2 (Rated capacity)
A17
(Rated current)
(Note) Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination: A (Asia), C (China), E (Europe), and U (USA).
5-16
–
(A codes continued)
Code
A18
Name
Motor 2
Data setting range
(Auto-tuning)
0: Disable
IncreUnit
ment
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
–
–
N
N
0
0.00 to 50.0
0.01
A
N
Y1
Y2
Rated
value of
Fuji
standard
motor
1: Tune when the motor stops (%R1
and %X)
2: Tune when the motor is rotating under V/f
control (%R1, %X, no-load current, slip
freq.)
A20
(No-load current)
A21
(%R1)
0.00 to 50.00
0.01
%
Y
Y1
Y2
Rated
value of
Fuji
standard
motor
A22
(%X)
0.00 to 50.00
0.01
%
Y
Y1
Y2
Rated
value of
Fuji
standard
motor
A23
(Slip compensation gain
for driving)
0.0 to 200.0
0.1
%
Y*
Y
100.0
A24
(Slip compensation
response time)
0.01 to 10.00
0.01
s
Y
Y1
Y2
1.00
A25
(Slip compensation gain
for braking)
0.0 to 200.0
0.1
%
Y*
Y
100.0
A26
(Rated slip frequency)
0.00 to 15.00
0.01
Hz
N
Y1
Y2
Rated
value of
Fuji
standard
motor
–
–
N
Y1
Y2
ACE:0
U:1
0.01
–
Y
Y
0.20
A39
Motor 2 Selection
0: Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard IM,
8-series)
1: Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating IM)
3: Motor characteristics 3 (Fuji standard IM,
6-series)
4: Other motors (IM)
A41
Output Current
Fluctuation Damping
Gain for Motor 2
0.00 to 0.40
A51
Cumulative Run Time of
Motor 2
0 to 9999 (in units of 10 hours)
–
–
N
N
–
A52
Startup Counter for
Motor 2
Indication of cumulative startup count
(0000 to FFFF in hex.)
–
–
Y
N
–
(Note) Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination: A (Asia), C (China), E (Europe), and U (USA).
5-17
–
J codes: Application Functions
Code
J01
Name
Data setting range
PID Control
0: Disable
(Mode selection)
IncreUnit
ment
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
–
–
N
Y
0
–
–
N
Y
0
0.100
–
1: Enable (Process control, normal
operation)
2: Enable (Process control, inverse
operation)
J02
(Remote command SV)
0: UP/DOWN keys on keypad
1: PID process command 1
(Analog input terminals [12] and [C1])
3: Terminal command UP/DOWN control
4: Command via communications link
J03
P (Gain)
J04
I (Integral time)
J05
D (Differential time)
J06
(Feedback filter)
J15
(Operation level
for slow flowrate stop)
J16
(Elapsed time
from slow flowrate stop)
J17
(Initiation frequency)
J23
(Initiation deviation level
for slow flowrate stop)
J24
(Start latency time
for slow flowrate stop)
J68
Braking Signal
Y
Y
0.0 to 3600.0 *2
0.000 to 30.000 *2
0.001 times
0.1
s
Y
Y
0.0
0.00 to 600.00 *2
0.01
s
Y
Y
0.00
0.0 to 900.0
0.1
s
Y
Y
0.5
0.0 (Disable), 1.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
0.0
1
s
Y
Y
30
0.0 to 400.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
0.0
0.0 to 100.0
0.1
%
Y
Y
0.0
0 to 3660
1
s
Y
Y
0
0 to 200
1
%
Y
Y
100
1.0
0 to 3600
(Brake OFF current)
J69
(Brake OFF frequency)
J70
(Brake OFF timer)
J71
(Brake ON frequency)
J72
(Brake ON timer)
0.0 to 25.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
0.0 to 5.0
0.1
s
Y
Y
1.0
0.0 to 25.0
0.1
Hz
Y
Y
1.0
0.0 to 5.0
0.1
s
Y
Y
1.0
*2 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
5-18
y codes: Link Functions
Code
Name
Data setting range
y01
RS-485 Communication 1
(Station address)
y02
(Communications error
processing)
IncreUnit
ment
Refer
Change
Data Default
to
when
copying setting
page:
running
–
1 to 255
1
–
N
Y
1
0: Immediately trip with alarm er8
–
–
Y
Y
0
0.1
s
Y
Y
2.0
–
–
Y
Y
3
–
–
Y
Y
0
–
–
Y
Y
0
–
–
Y
Y
0
1
s
Y
Y
0
0.01
s
Y
Y
0.01
–
–
Y
Y
1
–
–
Y
Y
0
–
–
Y
N
0
1: Trip with alarm er8 after running for the
period specified by timer y03
2: Retry during the period specified by timer
y03. If the retry fails, trip with alarm er8.
If it succeeds, continue to run.
3: Continue to run
y03
(Timer)
y04
(Baud rate)
0.0 to 60.0
0: 2400 bps
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
y05
(Data length)
0: 8 bits
1: 7 bits
y06
(Parity check)
0: None (2 stop bits for Modbus RTU)
1: Even parity (1 stop bit for Modbus RTU)
2: Odd parity (1 stop bit for Modbus RTU)
3: None (1 stop bit for Modbus RTU)
y07
(Stop bits)
0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
y08
(No-response error
detection time)
0: No detection
1 to 60
y09
(Response interval)
0.00 to 1.00
y10
(Protocol selection)
0: Modbus RTU protocol
1: SX protocol (FRENIC Loader protocol)
2: Fuji general-purpose inverter protocol
y97
Communication Data
Storage Selection *1
0: Save into nonvolatile storage (Rewritable
times limited)
1: Write into temporary storage (Rewritable
times unlimited)
2: Save all data from temporary storage to
nonvolatile one (After saving data, the
y97 data automatically reverts to "1.")
y99
Loader Link Function
(Mode selection)
Frequency command Run command
0: Follow H30 data
Follow H30 data
1: Via RS-485 link
(Loader)
Follow H30 data
2: Follow H30 data
(Loader)
Via RS-485 link
(Loader)
3: Via RS-485 link
(Loader)
Via RS-485 link
(Loader)
*1 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
5-19
Table A Fuji Standard Motor Parameters
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Threephase
400 V
Singlephase
200 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Fuji's
standard
torque
boost (%)
Nominal rated
capacity of
Fuji standard
motor (kW)
Nominal rated current of
Fuji standard motor (A)
Inverter type
Function codes
F11/A07/E34/E37
Function
code
F09/A05
Shipping destination (version)
Function code
P02/A16
Asia
China
Europe
USA
0.1
FRN0001C2S-2†
8.4
0.62
0.68
0.73
0.63
0.2
FRN0002C2S-2†
8.4
1.18
1.30
1.38
1.21
0.20
0.4
FRN0004C2S-2†
7.1
2.10
2.30
2.36
2.11
0.40
0.75
FRN0006C2S-2†
6.8
3.29
3.60
3.58
3.27
0.75
1.5
FRN0010C2S-2†
6.8
5.56
6.10
5.77
5.44
1.50
2.2
FRN0012C2S-2†
6.8
8.39
9.20
8.80
8.24
2.20
3.7
FRN0020C2S-2†
5.5
13.67
15.00
14.26
13.40
3.70
0.4
FRN0002C2S-4†
7.1
1.04
1.15
1.15
1.06
0.40
0.75
FRN0004C2S-4†
6.8
1.72
1.82
1.80
1.63
0.75
1.5
FRN0005C2S-4†
6.8
3.10
3.20
3.10
2.76
1.50
2.2
FRN0007C2S-4†
6.8
4.54
4.72
4.60
4.12
2.20
3.7
(4.0)*
FRN0011C2S-4†
5.5
7.43
7.70
7.50
6.70
3.70
0.1
FRN0001C2S-7†
8.4
0.62
0.68
0.73
0.63
0.10
0.2
FRN0002C2S-7†
8.4
1.18
1.30
1.38
1.21
0.20
0.4
FRN0004C2S-7†
7.1
2.10
2.30
2.36
2.11
0.40
0.75
FRN0006C2S-7†
6.8
3.29
3.60
3.58
3.27
0.75
1.5
FRN0010C2S-7†
6.8
5.56
6.10
5.77
5.44
1.50
2.2
FRN0012C2S-7†
6.8
8.39
9.20
8.80
8.24
2.20
0.10
Note: A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination. For
three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it replaces A or U.
* 4.0 kW for the EU. The inverter type is FRN0011C2S-4E.
5-20
5.2 Details of Function Codes
This section provides the details of the function codes frequently used for the FRENIC-Mini series of
inverters.
For details about the function codes given below and other function codes not given below,
refer to the FRENIC-Mini User’s Manual (24A7-E-0023), Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES."
F00
Data Protection
F00 specifies whether to protect function code data (except F00) and digital reference data
(such as frequency command, PID command and timer operation) from accidentally getting
/
keys.
changed by pressing the
Data for F00
Function
0
Disable both data protection and digital reference protection,
allowing you to change both function code data and digital reference data with
/
keys.
the
1
Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection,
allowing you to change digital reference data with the
/
keys. But you
cannot change function code data (except F00).
2
Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection,
/
keys. But you
allowing you to change function code data with the
cannot change digital reference data.
3
Enable both data protection and digital reference protection,
not allowing you to change function code data or digital reference data with the
/
keys.
Enabling the protection disables the
/
keys to change function code data.
To change F00 data, simultaneous keying of
keys is required.
+
(from 0 to 1) or
+
(from 1 to 0)
Even when F00 = 1 or 3, function code data can be changed via the
communications link.
For similar purposes, WE-KP, a signal enabling editing of function code data from
the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals. (Refer to
the descriptions of E01 through E03.)
F01, C30
Frequency Command 1, Frequency Command 2
F01 or C30 sets the command source that specifies reference frequency 1 or reference
frequency 2, respectively.
Data for
F01, C30
Function
0
Enable
/
keys on the keypad.
(Refer to Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD.")
1
Enable the voltage input to terminal [12] (0 to +10 VDC, maximum frequency
obtained at +10 VDC).
5-21
Data for
F01, C30
2
Function
Enable the current input to terminal [C1] (+4 to +20 mA DC or 0 to +20 mA DC,
maximum frequency obtained at +20 mA DC).
Using function code C40 expands the input range from "+4 to +20 mA DC"
to "0 to +20 mA DC."
3
Enable the sum of voltage (0 to +10 VDC, maximum frequency obtained at +10
VDC) and current inputs (+4 to +20 mA DC or 0 to +20 mA DC, maximum
frequency obtained at +20 mA DC) given to terminals [12] and [C1], respectively.
Using function code C40 expands the input range from "+4 to +20 mA DC"
to "0 to +20 mA DC."
Note: If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency (F03, A01), the maximum
frequency will apply.
4
Enable the built-in potentiometer (POT). (Maximum frequency obtained at full
scale of the POT)
7
Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals.
The UP and DOWN should be assigned to any of digital input terminals [X1] to
[X3] beforehand with any of E01 to E03 (data = 17 and 18).
In addition to the frequency command sources described above, higher priority
command sources including communications link and multistep frequency are
provided. For details, refer to the block diagram given in FRENIC-Mini User's
Manual (24A7-E-0023), Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command
Generator."
• For frequency settings made by terminals [12] (voltage) and [C1] (current) and by
the built-in potentiometer, setting the gain and bias changes the relationship
between those frequency settings and the drive frequency. Refer to function
code F18 for details.
• For the inputs to terminals [12] (voltage) and [C1] (current), low-pass filters can
be enabled.
• Using the terminal command Hz2/Hz1 assigned to one of the digital input
terminals switches between frequency command 1 (F01) and frequency
command 2 (C30). Refer to function codes E01 to E03.
F02
Operation Method
F02 selects the source that specifies a run command for running the motor.
Data for F02
0
Run Command Source
Description
Keypad
(Rotation direction
specified by terminal
command)
Enable the
1
External signals
Enable terminal command FWD or REV to run and
stop the motor.
2
Keypad
(Forward rotation)
/
keys to run and stop the motor. Note
Enable
that this run command enables only the forward
rotation.
/
keys to run and stop the motor.
The rotation direction of the motor is specified by
terminal command FWD or REV.
There is no need to specify the rotation direction.
5-22
Data for F02
3
Run Command Source
Keypad
(Reverse rotation)
Description
/
keys to run and stop the motor. Note
Enable
that this run command enables only the reverse
rotation.
There is no need to specify the rotation direction.
• When function code F02 = 0 or 1, the "Run forward" FWD and "Run reverse" REV
terminal commands must be assigned to terminals [FWD] and [REV],
respectively.
• When the FWD or REV is ON, the F02 data cannot be changed.
• When assigning the FWD or REV to terminal [FWD] or [REV] with F02 being set
to "1," be sure to turn the target terminal OFF beforehand; otherwise, the motor
may unintentionally rotate.
• In addition to the run command sources described above, higher priority
command sources including communications link are provided. For details, refer
to the FRENIC-Mini User's Manual (24A7-E-0023).
F03
Maximum Frequency 1
F03 specifies the maximum frequency (for motor 1) to limit the output frequency. Specifying
the maximum frequency exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may
cause damage or a dangerous situation. Make sure that the maximum frequency setting
matches the equipment rating.
The inverter can easily accept high-speed operation. When changing the speed setting, carefully
check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand.
Otherwise injuries could occur.
Modifying F03 data to allow a higher reference frequency requires also changing
F15 data specifying a frequency limiter (high).
F04
F05
F06
H50, H51
H52, H53
Base Frequency 1
Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1
Maximum Output Voltage 1
Non-linear V/f Pattern 1 (Frequency and Voltage)
Non-linear V/f Pattern 2 (Frequency and Voltage)
These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency
essentially required for running the motor properly. If combined with the related function codes
H50 through H53, these function codes may profile the non-linear V/f pattern by specifying
increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V/f pattern.
The following description includes setups required for the non-linear V/f pattern.
At high frequencies, the motor impedance may increase, resulting in an insufficient output
voltage and a decrease in output torque. This feature is used to increase the voltage with the
maximum output voltage 1 to prevent this problem from happening. Note, however, that you
cannot increase the output voltage beyond the voltage of the inverter’s input power.
5-23
„ Base Frequency 1 (F04)
Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor.
„ Rated Voltage at Base Frequency (F05)
Set "0" or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor.
- If "0" is set, the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the
inverter. The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage.
- If the data is set to anything other than "0," the inverter automatically keeps the output
voltage constant in line with the setting. When any of the auto torque boost settings, auto
energy saving or slip compensation is active, the voltage settings should be equal to the
rated voltage of the motor.
„ Non-linear V/f Patterns 1 and 2 for Frequency (H50 and H52)
Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point of the non-linear V/f pattern.
(Setting "0.0" to H50 or H52 disables the non-linear V/f pattern operation.)
„ Non-linear V/f Patterns 1 and 2 for Voltage (H51 and H53)
Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point of the non-linear V/f pattern.
„ Maximum Output Voltage (F06)
Set the voltage for the maximum frequency 1 (F03).
• If F05 (Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1) is set to "0," settings of H50 through
H53 and F06 do not take effect. (When the non-linear point is below the base
frequency, the linear V/f pattern applies; when it is above, the output voltage is
kept constant.)
• When the auto torque boost (F37) is enabled, the non-linear V/f pattern takes no
effect.
Examples:
„ Normal (linear) V/f pattern
5-24
„ V/f pattern with two non-linear points
F07
F08
E10
E11
Acceleration Time 1
Deceleration Time 1
Acceleration Time 2
Deceleration Time 2
F07 specifies the acceleration time, the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to
the maximum frequency. F08 specifies the deceleration time, the length of time the frequency
decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz.
• Selecting an S-shaped pattern or curvilinear acceleration/deceleration pattern
with function code H07 (Acceleration/deceleration pattern) makes the actual
acceleration/deceleration times longer than the specified ones. Refer to the
descriptions of function code H07.
• Specifying an improperly short acceleration/deceleration time may activate the
current limiter or anti-regenerative control, resulting in a longer acceleration/
deceleration time than the specified one.
Acceleration/deceleration time 1 (F07, F08) and acceleration/deceleration time 2
(E10, E11) are switched by terminal command RT1 assigned to any of the digital
input terminals with any of function codes E01 through E03.
5-25
F09
F37
Torque Boost 1
Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation 1
F37 specifies V/f pattern, torque boost type, and auto energy saving operation for optimizing
the operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load. F09 specifies the type of
torque boost in order to provide sufficient starting torque.
Data for
F37
V/f pattern
Torque boost
(F09)
0
Variable
torque V/f
pattern
Torque boost
specified by
F09
1
Linear
V/f pattern
2
3
Variable
torque V/f
pattern
4
Linear
V/f pattern
5
Auto energy
saving
Applicable load
Variable torque load
(General purpose fans and pumps)
Disable
Constant torque load
Auto torque
boost
Constant torque load
(To be selected if a motor may be
over-excited at no load.)
Torque boost
specified by
F09
Variable torque load
(General purpose fans and pumps)
Enable
Auto torque
boost
Constant torque load
Constant torque load
(To be selected if a motor may be
over-excited at no load.)
Note: If a required "load torque + acceleration toque" is more than 50% of the rated torque, it
is recommended to select the linear V/f pattern (factory default).
„ V/f characteristics
The FRENIC-Mini series of inverters offers a variety of V/f patterns and torque boosts, which
include V/f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps or for
special pump load requiring high starting torque. Two types of torque boost are available:
manual and automatic.
Variable torque V/f pattern (F37 = 0)
Linear V/f pattern (F37 = 1)
When the variable torque V/f pattern is selected (F37 = 0 or 3), the output voltage
may be low and insufficient voltage output may result in less output torque of the
motor at a low frequency zone, depending on some characteristics of the motor itself
and load. In such a case, it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low
frequency zone using the non-linear V/f pattern (H50, H51).
Recommended value: H50 = 1/10 of the base frequency
H51 = 1/10 of the voltage at base frequency
5-26
„ Torque boost
• Manual torque boost (F09)
In torque boost using F09, constant voltage is added to the basic V/f pattern, regardless of the
load, to give the output voltage. To secure a sufficient starting torque, manually adjust the
output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09. Specify an appropriate
level that guarantees smooth start-up and yet does not cause over-excitation with no or light
load.
Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant
regardless of the load fluctuation.
Specify the F09 data in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency 1 (F05). At factory
shipment, F09 is preset to a level that provides approx. 100% of starting torque.
Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque, but may cause
overcurrent due to over-excitation at no load. If you continue to drive the motor, it
may overheat. To avoid such a situation, adjust torque boost to an appropriate level.
When the non-linear V/f pattern and the torque boost are used together, the torque
boost takes effect below the frequency on the non-linear V/f pattern’s point.
5-27
• Auto torque boost
This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load. Under
light load, auto torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from
over-excitation. Under heavy load, it increases the output voltage to increase output torque of
the motor.
• Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor, set the base
frequency 1 (F04), the rated voltage at base frequency 1 (F05), and other
pertinent motor parameters (P02, P03 and P06 through P99) in line with the
motor capacity and characteristics, or else perform auto-tuning (P04).
• When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity, the
maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable.
In such cases, do not use auto torque boost but choose manual torque boost per
F09 (F37 = 0 or 1).
„ Auto energy saving operation
This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power
loss of motor and inverter. (Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the
motor or load characteristics. Check the advantage of energy saving before actually apply this
feature to your power system.)
This feature applies to constant speed operation only. During acceleration/deceleration, the
inverter will run with manual torque boost (F09) or auto torque boost, depending on the F37
data. If auto energy saving operation is enabled, the response to a change in motor speed
may be slow. Do not use this feature for such a system that requires quick acceleration/
deceleration.
• Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower. If the
base frequency is set at 60 Hz or higher, you may get a little or no energy saving
advantage. The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the
frequency lower than the base frequency. If the frequency becomes higher than
the base frequency, the auto energy saving operation will be invalid.
• Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor, set the base
frequency 1 (F04), the rated voltage at base frequency 1 (F05), and other
pertinent motor parameters (P02, P03 and P06 through P99) in line with the
motor capacity and characteristics, or else perform auto-tuning (P04).
F10
F11
F12
Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 (Select motor characteristics)
Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 (Overload detection level)
Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 (Thermal time constant)
F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal
overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor.
F10 selects the motor cooling mechanism to specify its characteristics, F11 specifies the
overload detection current, and F12 specifies the thermal time constant.
Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the
overload early warning. Even if you need only the overload early warning, set these
characteristics data to these function codes. To disable the electronic thermal
overload protection, set function code F11 to "0.00."
5-28
„ Motor characteristics (F10)
F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor-- shaft-driven or separately powered cooling
fan.
Data for F10
Function
1
For a general-purpose motor and Fuji standard permanent magnet synchronous
motor with shaft-driven cooling fan.
(The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation.)
2
For an inverter-driven motor with separately powered cooling fan.
(The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency.)
The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection
when F10 = 1. The characteristic factors α1 through α3 as well as their corresponding
switching frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor.
The tables below list the factors determined by the motor capacity (P02) and the motor
characteristics (P99).
Cooling Characteristics of Motor with Shaft-driven Cooling Fan
Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 (Motor 1 selection) = 0 or 4
Nominal
Thermal time
applied motor
constant τ
(kW)
(Factory default)
Output frequency for
Reference current
motor characteristic factor
for setting the
thermal time
f2
f3
constant (Imax)
0.1 to 0.75
Characteristic
factor
α1
α2
α3
75% 85% 100%
7 Hz
1.5 to 4.0
5.5 to 11
85% 85% 100%
5 min
Allowable
continuous current
× 150%
15
18.5, 22
30
5 Hz
Base
frequency
× 33%
10 min
5-29
6 Hz
90% 95% 100%
7 Hz
85% 85% 100%
5 Hz
92% 100% 100%
Base
frequency
× 33%
54% 85% 90%
Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 (Motor 1 Selection) = 1 or 3
Reference current
Output frequency for
for setting the
motor characteristic factor
thermal time
f2
f3
constant (Imax)
Nominal
Thermal time
applied motor
constant τ
(kW)
(Factory default)
0.1 to 22
5 min
30
10 min
Allowable
continuous current
× 150%
Base
frequency
× 33%
Characteristic
factor
α1
α2
α3
Base
frequency
× 33%
69% 90% 90%
Base
frequency
× 83%
54% 85% 95%
When F10 = 2, the cooling effect is not decreased by the output frequency so that the
overload detection level is a constant value without reduction (F11).
„ Overload detection level (F11)
F11 specifies the detection level (in amperes) at which the electronic thermal overload
protection becomes activated.
In general, set F11 to the rated current of motor when driven at the base frequency (i.e. 1.0 to
1.1 multiple of the rated current of motor 1 (P03)). To disable the electronic thermal overload
protection, set F11 to "0.00: Disable."
„ Thermal time constant (F12)
F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor. If the current of 150% of the overload
detection level specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12, the electronic thermal
overload protection becomes activated to detect the motor overload. The thermal time
constant for general-purpose motors including Fuji motors is approx. 5 minutes by factory
default.
- Data setting range: 0.5 to 75.0 (minutes) in increments of 0.1 (minute)
(Example) When the F12 data is set at "5.0" (5 minutes)
As shown below, the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm
condition (alarm code 0l1 ) when the output current of 150% of the overload detection level
(specified by F11) flows for 5 minutes, and 120% for approx. 12.5 minutes.
The actual time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the
specified value, taking into account the time period from when the output current exceeds the
allowable continuous drive current (100%) until it reaches 150% of the overload detection
level.
5-30
Example of Thermal Overload Detection Characteristics
F14
H13
H14
Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure
Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure, Restart time
Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure, Frequency fall rate
F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a
momentary power failure.
„ Restart mode after momentary power failure (Mode selection) (F14)
Data for F14
Mode
Description
0
Disable restart
(Trip immediately)
As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the
undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power
failure, the inverter issues undervoltage alarm lu and
shuts down its output so that the motor enters a
coast-to-stop state.
1
Disable restart
(Trip after recovery
from power failure)
As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the
undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power
failure, the inverter shuts down its output so that the
motor enters a coast-to-stop state, but it does not enter
the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm lu .
The moment the power is restored, an undervoltage
alarm lu is issued, while the motor remains in a
coast-to-stop state.
5-31
Data for F14
Mode
Description
2
Trip after
decelerate-to-stop
As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the
continuous running level due to a momentary power
failure, decelerate-to-shop control is invoked.
Decelerate-to-stop control regenerates kinetic energy
from the load's moment of inertia, slowing down the
motor and continuing the deceleration operation. After
decelerate-to-stop operation, an undervoltage alarm
lu is issued.
4
Enable restart
(Restart at the
frequency at which the
power failure occurred,
for general loads)
As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the
undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power
failure, the inverter saves the output frequency being
applied at that time and shuts down the output so that
the motor enters a coast-to-stop state.
(Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.)
If a run command has been input, restoring power
restarts the inverter at the output frequency saved
during the last power failure processing.
This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of
inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly,
such as fans, even after the motor enters a
coast-to-stop state upon occurrence of a momentary
power failure.
5
Enable restart
(Restart at the starting
frequency, for
low-inertia load)
After a momentary power failure, restoring power and
then entering a run command restarts the inverter at the
starting frequency specified by function code F23.
This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as
pumps, having a small moment of inertia, in which the
motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it
enters a coast-to-stop state upon occurrence of a
momentary power failure.
If you enable the "Restart mode after momentary power failure" (Function code F14 = 4 or 5), the
inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is restored. Design the
machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting.
Otherwise an accident could occur.
5-32
„ Restart mode after momentary power failure (Basic operation)
The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link
bus voltage goes below the undervoltage detection level, while the inverter is running. If the
load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short,
the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized,
and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted.
Upon recognizing a momentary power failure, the inverter enters the restart mode (after a
recovery from momentary power failure) and prepares for restart. When power is restored, the
inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready-to-run state. When a
momentary power failure occurs, the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay
sequence circuits may also drop so as to turn the run command OFF. In consideration of such
a situation, the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run command input after the inverter enters a
ready-to-run state. If a run command is received within 2 seconds, the inverter begins the
restart processing in accordance with the F14 data (Mode selection). If no run command has
been received within 2-second wait period, the inverter cancels the restart mode (after a
recovery from momentary power failure) and needs to be started again from the ordinary
starting frequency. Therefore, ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a
recovery of power, or install a mechanical latch relay.
When run commands are entered via the keypad, the above operation is also necessary for
the mode (F02 = 0) in which the rotational direction is determined by the terminal command,
FWD or REV. In the modes where the rotational direction is fixed (F02 = 2 or 3), it is retained
inside the inverter so that the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready-to-run
state.
If the "Coast to a stop" terminal command BX is entered during the power failure,
the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode. If a
run command is entered with power supply applied, the inverter will start from the
normal starting frequency (F23).
5-33
During a momentary power failure, the motor slows down. After power is restored, the inverter
restarts at the frequency just before the momentary power failure. Then, the current limiting
function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases. When the
output frequency matches the motor speed, the motor accelerates up to the original output
frequency. See the figure below. In this case, the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be
enabled (H12 = 1).
„ Restart mode after momentary power failure (Restart time) (H13)
H13 specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter
reacts for restarting process.
If the inverter starts the motor while motor’s residual voltage is still in a high level, a large
inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurrence of temporary
regeneration. For safety, therefore, it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that restart
will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level. Note that even when
power is restored, restart will not take place until the restart time (H13) has elapsed.
Factory default
By factory default, H13 is set at one of the values shown below according to the inverter
capacity. Basically, you do not need to change H13 data. However, if the long restart time
causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem, you might
as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value. In such a case, make sure that
no alarm occurs.
Inverter capacity (kW)
Factory default of H13 (Restart time in seconds)
0.1 to 7.5
0.5
11 to 15
1.0
5-34
„ Restart mode after momentary power failure (Frequency fall rate) (H14)
During restart after a momentary power failure, if the inverter output frequency and the idling
motor speed cannot be harmonized with each other, an overcurrent will flow, activating the
overcurrent limiter. If it happens, the inverter reduces the output frequency to match the idling
motor speed according to the reduction rate (Frequency fall rate: Hz/s) specified by H14.
Data for H14
0.00
0.01 to 100.00 (Hz/s)
999
Inverter’s action for the output frequency fall
Follow the selected deceleration time
Follow data specified by H14
Follow the setting of the PI processor in the current limiter.
(The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter.)
If the frequency fall rate is too high, regeneration may take place at the moment the
motor rotation matches the inverter output frequency, causing an overvoltage trip.
On the contrary, if the frequency fall rate is too low, the time required for the output
frequency to match the motor speed (duration of current limiting action) may be
prolonged, triggering the inverter overload prevention control.
F15, F16
H63
Frequency Limiter (High and Low)
Low Limiter (Mode selection)
F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency, respectively.
H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the output frequency drops below the low
level specified by F16, as follows:
• When H63 = 0, the output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16.
• When H63 = 1, the inverter decelerates to stop the motor.
• When you change the frequency limiter (High) (F15) in order to raise the
reference frequency, be sure to change the maximum frequency (F03, A01)
accordingly.
• Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control:
F15 > F16, F15 > F23(A12), and F15 > F25
F03/A01 > F16
where, F23(A12) is of the starting frequency and F25 is of the stop frequency.
If you specify any wrong data for these function codes, the inverter may not run
the motor at the desired speed, or cannot start it normally.
5-35
F18
C50
C32, C34
C37, C39
Bias (Frequency command 1)
Bias (for Frequency 1) (Bias base point)
Analog Input Adjustment for [12] (Gain, Gain base point)
Analog Input Adjustment [C1] (Gain, Gain base point)
When any analog input for frequency command 1 (F01) is used, it is possible to define the
relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and
adding the bias specified by F18.
As shown in the graph below, the relationship between the analog input and the reference
frequency specified by frequency command 1 is determined by points "A" and "B." Point "A" is
defined by the combination of the bias (F18) and its base point (C50); Point "B," by the
combination of the gain (C32, C37) and its base point (C34, C39).
The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal [12] and that of C37 and C39, to terminal
[C1].
Configure the bias (F18) and gain (C32, C37), assuming the maximum frequency as 100%,
and the bias base point (C50) and gain base point (C34, C39), assuming the full scale (10
VDC or 20 mA DC) of analog input as 100%.
• The analog input less than the bias base point (C50) is limited by the bias value
(F18).
• Specifying that the data of the bias base point (C50) is equal to or greater than
that of each gain base point (C34, C39) will be interpreted as invalid, so the
inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz.
Example: Setting the bias, gain and their base points when the reference frequency 0 to 100%
follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal [12] (in frequency command 1).
5-36
(Point A)
To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V, set the bias to 0% (F18
= 0). Since 1 V is the bias base point and it is equal to 10% of 10 V (full scale), set the bias
base point to 10% (C50 = 10).
(Point B)
To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being
at 5 V, set the gain to 100% (C32 = 100). Since 5 V is the gain base point and it is equal to 50%
of 10 V (full scale), set the gain base point to 50% (C34 = 50).
The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any base
points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters.
F20 to F22
H95
DC Braking 1 (Braking starting frequency, Braking level, and Braking time)
DC Braking (Braking response mode)
F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during
decelerate-to-stop operation.
If the motor enters a decelerate-to-stop operation by turning OFF the run command or by
decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency, the inverter activates the DC
braking by flowing a current at the braking level (F21) during the braking time (F22) when the
output frequency reaches the DC braking starting frequency (F20).
Setting the braking time (F22) to "0.00" disables the DC braking.
„ Braking starting frequency (F20)
F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor
decelerate-to-stop state.
„ Braking level (F21)
F21 specifies the output current level to be applied when the DC braking is activated. The
function code data should be set, assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100%,
in increments of 1%.
„ Braking time (F22)
F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking.
„ Braking response mode (H95)
H95 specifies the DC braking response mode.
Data for H95
Characteristics
Note
0
Slow response. Slows the rising edge of
the current, thereby preventing reverse
rotation at the start of DC braking.
Insufficient braking torque may
result at the start of DC braking.
1
Quick response. Quickens the rising
edge of the current, thereby accelerating
the build-up of the braking torque.
Reverse rotation may result
depending on the moment of
inertia of the mechanical load and
the coupling mechanism.
5-37
It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as an "Enable DC braking"
terminal command DCBRK.
As long as the DCBRK command is ON, the inverter performs DC braking,
regardless of the braking time specified by F22.
Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state
activates DC braking. This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting,
resulting in smoother acceleration (quicker build-up of acceleration torque).
In general, specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip
frequency of motor. If you set it at an extremely high value, control may become
unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases.
The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism.
Injuries could occur.
F23
F24
F25
F39
Starting Frequency 1
Starting Frequency 1 (Holding time)
Stop Frequency
Stop Frequency (Holding time)
At the startup of an inverter, the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency 1
specified by F23. The inverter stops its output when the output frequency reaches the stop
frequency specified by F25.
Set the starting frequency to a level at which the motor can generate enough torque for startup.
Generally, set the motor's rated slip frequency as the starting frequency.
In addition, to compensate for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the
motor, F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency. To stabilize the motor speed at
the stop of the motor, F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency.
If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency, the inverter will not output
any power as long as the reference frequency does not exceed the stop frequency.
5-38
F26, F27
Motor Sound (Carrier frequency and tone)
„ Motor sound (Carrier frequency) (F26)
F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or
electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself, and to decrease a leakage current from the
main output (secondary) wirings.
Carrier frequency
0.75 to 16 kHz
Motor sound noise emission
High ↔ Low
Motor temperature (due to harmonics components)
High ↔ Low
Ripples in output current waveform
Large ↔ Small
Leakage current
Low ↔ High
Electromagnetic noise emission
Low ↔ High
Inverter loss
Low ↔ High
Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to
have a large amount of ripples. As a result, the motor loss increases, causing the
motor temperature to rise. Furthermore, the large amount of ripples tends to cause
a current limiting alarm. When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below,
therefore, reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80% or
less of the rated current.
When a high carrier frequency is specified, the temperature of the inverter may rise
due to an ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load. If it happens, the
inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter
overload alarm 0lu . With consideration for motor noise, the automatic reduction of
carrier frequency can be disabled. Refer to the description of H98.
„ Motor sound (Tone) (F27)
F27 changes the motor running sound tone. This setting is effective when the carrier
frequency set to function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower. Changing the tone level may reduce the
high and harsh running noise from the motor.
If the sound level is set too high, the output current may become unstable, or
mechanical vibration and noise may increase. Also, these function codes may not be
very effective for certain types of motor.
5-39
F30
F31
Analog Output [FMA] (Voltage adjustment)
Analog Output [FMA] (Function)
These function codes allow terminal [FMA] to output monitored data such as the output
frequency and the output current in an analog DC voltage. The magnitude of the output
voltage is adjustable.
„ Voltage adjustment (F30)
F30 adjusts the output voltage representing the monitored data selected by F31 within the
range of 0 to 300%.
„ Function (F31)
F31 specifies what is output to analog output terminal [FMA].
Data for
F31
[FM] output
Function
(Monitor the following)
0
Output frequency
(before slip
compensation)
Output frequency of the inverter
(Equivalent to the motor
synchronous speed)
Maximum frequency (F03, A01)
1
Output frequency
(after slip
compensation)
Output frequency of the inverter
Maximum frequency (F03, A01)
2
Output current
Output current (RMS) of the
inverter
Twice the inverter rated current
3
Output voltage
Output voltage (RMS) of the
inverter
250 V for 200 V class series,
500 V for 400 V class series
6
Input power
Input power of the inverter
Twice the rated output of the
inverter
7
PID feedback
amount
Feedback amount under PID
control
100% of the feedback amount
9
DC link bus
voltage
DC link bus voltage of the
inverter
500 V for 200 V class series,
1000 V for 400 V class series
14
Calibration
Full scale output of the meter
calibration
This always outputs +10 VDC
(FMA function).
15
PID command
(SV)
Command value under PID
control
100% of the PID command value
PID output (MV)
Output level of the PID
controller under PID control
(Frequency command)
Maximum frequency
(F03, A01)
16
5-40
Meter scale
(Full scale at 100%)
F42
Control Mode Selection 1
F42 specifies the control mode of the inverter to control a motor.
Data for F42
Control mode
0
V/f control with slip compensation inactive
1
Dynamic torque vector control
2
V/f control with slip compensation active
11
V/f control for PMSM drive
„ V/f control
In this control, the inverter controls a motor by the voltage and frequency according to the V/f
pattern specified by function codes.
„ Slip compensation
Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor
characteristics, decreasing the motor rotation. The inverter’s slip compensation facility first
presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the
output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation. This prevents the motor
from decreasing the rotation due to the slip.
That is, this facility is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy.
The compensation value is specified by combination of function codes P12 (Rated slip
frequency), P09 (Slip compensation gain for driving)) and P11 (Slip compensation gain for
braking).
„ Dynamic torque vector control
To get the maximal torque out of a motor, this control calculates the motor torque for the load
applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output.
Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation
function and disables auto energy saving operation.
This control is effective for improving the system response against external disturbances and
the motor speed control accuracy.
„ V/f control for PMSM drive
Under this control, the inverter drives a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM).
Refer to Section 5.3 "Notes in Driving PMSM" for details.
5-41
F43, F44
Current Limiter (Mode selection, Level)
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter (F44),
the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limit the output
current. (Refer to the description of function code H12.)
If F43 = 1, the current limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation. If F43 = 2, the
current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation. Choose
F43 = 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the
output current during constant speed operation.
„ Mode selection (F43)
F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active.
Running states that enable the current limiter
Data for
F43
During acceleration
During constant speed
During deceleration
0
Disable
Disable
Disable
1
Disable
Enable
Disable
2
Enable
Enable
Disable
„ Level (F44)
F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated, in ratio
to the inverter rating.
• Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software, it
may cause a delay in control. If you need a quick response, specify a current limit
operation by hardware (H12 = 1) at the same time.
• If an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set
extremely low, the inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency. This may cause
an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to
undershooting.
5-42
F50, F51
Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor
(Discharging capability and Allowable average loss)
A braking resistor can be mounted on inverters of 0.4 kW or above.
These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the
braking resistor.
Set F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss, respectively.
Since those values differ depending on the specifications of the braking resistor, refer to the
tables given below or calculate them according to the expressions given in the FRENIC-Mini
User's Manual (24A7-E-0023), Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES."
Depending on the thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor, the
electronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues
the overheat protection alarm dbh even if the actual temperature rise is not
enough. If it happens, review the relationship between the performance index of the
braking resistor and settings of related function codes.
The tables below list the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking
resistor. These values depend upon the inverter and braking resistor models.
„ External Braking Resistors
Standard models
The thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor acts as a thermal protector of the
motor for overheat, so assign an "Enable external alarm trip" terminal command THR to any of
digital input terminals [X1] to [X3], [FWD] and [REV] and connect that terminal and its common
terminal to braking resistor's terminals 2 and 1.
To protect the motor from overheat without using the thermal sensor relay mounted on the
braking resistor, configure the electronic thermal overload protection facility by setting F50
and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss values listed below,
respectively.
Power
supply
voltage
Braking resistor
Inverter type
Type
FRN0004C2S-2†
Threephase
200 V
FRN0006C2S-2†
FRN0010C2S-2†
FRN0012C2S-2†
FRN0020C2S-2†
FRN0002C2S-4†
Threephase
400 V
FRN0004C2S-4†
FRN0005C2S-4†
FRN0007C2S-4†
FRN0011C2S-4†
FRN0004C2S-7†
Singlephase
200 V
FRN0006C2S-7†
FRN0010C2S-7†
FRN0012C2S-7†
Qty.
Resistance
(Ω)
DB0.75-2
100
DB2.2-2
40
DB3.7-2
33
DB0.75-4
200
1
DB2.2-4
160
DB3.7-4
130
DB0.75-2
100
DB2.2-2
40
Continuous braking
(100% braking torque)
Discharging
capability
(kWs)
Intermittent braking
(Period: 100 s or less)
Braking
Allowable
time
average loss
(s)
(kW)
9
Duty
(%ED)
0.044
22
45
0.068
18
0.075
10
33
30
0.077
7
37
20
0.093
5
0.044
22
45
0.068
18
0.075
10
33
30
0.077
7
37
20
0.093
5
0.044
22
45
0.068
18
0.075
10
30
0.077
7
17
34
9
17
34
9
17
34
33
Note: A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination. For three-phase 200 V
class series of inverters, it replaces A or U.
5-43
Compact models
When using the compact models of braking resistor TK80W120Ω or TK80W100Ω, set F50 to
"7" and F51 to "0.033."
10% ED models
Power
supply
voltage
Braking resistor
Inverter type
Type
FRN0004C2S-2†
Threephase
200 V
FRN0006C2S-2†
FRN0010C2S-2†
FRN0012C2S-2†
FRN0020C2S-2†
FRN0002C2S-4†
Threephase
400 V
FRN0004C2S-4†
FRN0005C2S-4†
FRN0007C2S-4†
FRN0011C2S-4†
FRN0004C2S-7†
Singlephase
200 V
FRN0006C2S-7†
FRN0010C2S-7†
FRN0012C2S-7†
Qty.
Resistance
(Ω)
Continuous braking
(100% braking torque)
Discharging
capacity
(kWs)
DB0.75-2C
100
50
DB2.2-2C
40
55
DB3.7-2C
33
140
DB0.75-4C
200
50
160
55
1
DB2.2-4C
DB3.7-4C
130
140
DB0.75-2C
100
50
DB2.2-2C
40
55
Braking
time
(s)
250
133
73
50
75
250
133
73
50
75
250
133
73
50
Intermittent braking
(Period: 100 s or less)
Allowable
average
loss (kW)
0.075
0.110
0.185
0.075
0.110
0.185
0.075
0.110
Duty
(%ED)
37
20
14
10
37
20
14
10
37
20
14
10
Note: A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination. For
three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it replaces A or U.
E01 to E03, Terminal [X1] to [X3] Function
Terminal [FWD] and [REV] Function
E98, E99
Function codes E01 to E03, E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals [X1] to
[X3], [FWD], and [REV] which are general-purpose, programmable, digital input terminals.
These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to
define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal. The default
setting is normal logic system "Active ON." So, explanations that follow are given in normal
logic system "Active ON."
In the case of digital input, you can assign commands to the switching means for the run
command and its operation and the reference frequency (e.g., SS1, SS2, SS4, SS8, Hz2/Hz1,
Hz/PID, IVS, and LE). Be aware that switching any of such signals may cause a sudden start
(running) or an abrupt change in speed.
An accident or physical injury may result.
5-44
Function code data
Active ON
Active OFF
0
1000
1
1001
2
1002
3
1003
Terminal commands assigned
Symbol
SS1
Select multistep frequency (0 to 15 steps)
SS2
SS4
SS8
4
1004
Select ACC/DEC time
RT1
6
1006
Enable 3-wire operation
HLD
7
1007
Coast to a stop
BX
8
1008
Reset alarm
RST
1009
9
10
1010
Enable external alarm trip
THR
Ready for jogging
JOG
11
1011
Select frequency command 2/1
12
1012
Select motor 2 / motor 1
Hz2/Hz1
M2/M1
13
⎯
Enable DC braking
DCBRK
17
1017
UP (Increase output frequency)
18
1018
DOWN (Decrease output frequency)
DOWN
UP
19
1019
Enable data change with keypad
WE-KP
20
1020
Cancel PID control
Hz/PID
21
1021
Switch normal/inverse operation
24
1024
Enable communications link via RS-485
33
1033
Reset PID integral and differential components
PID-RST
34
1034
Hold PID integral component
PID-HLD
98
⎯
Run forward
(Exclusively assigned to [FWD] and [REV] terminals
by E98 and E99)
99
⎯
Run reverse
(Exclusively assigned to [FWD] and [REV] terminals
by E98 and E99)
IVS
LE
FWD
REV
Any negative logic (Active OFF) command cannot be assigned to the functions
marked with "⎯" in the "Active OFF" column.
The "Enable external alarm trip" and "Force to stop" are fail-safe terminal
commands. For example, when data = 9 in "Enable external alarm trip," "Active
OFF" (alarm is triggered when OFF); when data = 1009, "Active ON" (alarm is
triggered when ON).
5-45
Terminal function assignment and data setting
„ Select multistep frequency (0 to 15 steps) -- SS1, SS2, SS4, and SS8
(Function code data = 0, 1, 2, and 3)
The combination of the ON/OFF states of digital input signals SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 selects
one of 16 different frequency commands defined beforehand by 15 function codes C05 to C19
(Multistep frequency 0 to 15). With this, the inverter can drive the motor at 16 different preset
frequencies.
The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching
SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8. In the "Selected frequency" column, "Other than multistep
frequency" represents the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 (F01),
frequency command 2 (C30), or others.
SS8
SS4
SS2
SS1
Selected frequency
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Other than multistep frequency
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
C05 (Multistep frequency 1)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
C06 (Multistep frequency 2)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
C07 (Multistep frequency 3)
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
C08 (Multistep frequency 4)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
C09 (Multistep frequency 5)
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
C10 (Multistep frequency 6)
OFF
ON
ON
ON
C11 (Multistep frequency 7)
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
C12 (Multistep frequency 8)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
C13 (Multistep frequency 9)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
C14 (Multistep frequency 10)
ON
OFF
ON
ON
C15 (Multistep frequency 11)
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
C16 (Multistep frequency 12)
ON
ON
OFF
ON
C17 (Multistep frequency 13)
ON
ON
ON
OFF
C18 (Multistep frequency 14)
ON
ON
ON
ON
C19 (Multistep frequency 15)
„ Select ACC/DEC time -- RT1 (Function code data = 4)
This terminal command switches between ACC/DEC time 1 (F07, F08) and ACC/DEC time 2
(E10, E11).
If no RT1 command is assigned, ACC/DEC time 1 (F07, F08) takes effect by default.
Input terminal command
RT1
Acceleration/deceleration time
OFF
Acceleration/deceleration time 1 (F07, F08)
ON
Acceleration/deceleration time 2 (E10, E11)
5-46
„
Enable 3-wire operation -- HLD (Function code data = 6)
Turning this terminal command ON self-holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command
issued with it, to enable 3-wire inverter operation.
Short-circuiting the terminals between HLD and [CM] (i.e., when HLD is ON) self-holds the
first FWD or REV command at its leading edge. Turning HLD OFF releases the self-holding.
When HLD is not assigned, 2-wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect.
„ Coast to a stop -- BX (Function code data = 7)
Turning this terminal command ON immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the
motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarms.
„ Reset alarm -- RST (Function code data = 8)
Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state--alarm output (for any fault). Turning
it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state.
When you turn the RST command ON, keep it ON for 10 ms or more. This command should
be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation.
„ Enable external alarm trip -- THR (Function code data = 9)
Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output (so that the
motor coasts to a stop), displays the alarm 0h2, and outputs the alarm relay (for any fault)
ALM. The THR command is self-held, and is reset when an alarm reset takes place.
Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to
immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in a
peripheral equipment.
5-47
„
Ready for jogging -- JOG (Function code data = 10)
This terminal command is used to jog or inch the motor for positioning a work piece.
Turning this command ON makes the inverter ready for jogging.
Simultaneous keying
+
keys on the keypad is functionally equivalent to this command;
however, it is restricted by the run command source as listed below.
When the run command source is the keypad (F02 = 0, 2 or 3):
Input terminal command
JOG
+
keys on the keypad
⎯
ON
Pressing these keys toggles between
the "normal operation" and "ready for
jogging."
OFF
Inverter running state
Ready for jogging
Normal operation
Ready for jogging
When the run command source is digital input (F02 = 1):
Input terminal command
JOG
+
keys on the keypad
ON
Inverter running state
Ready for jogging
Disable
OFF
Normal operation
Jogging operation
Pressing the
key or turning the FWD or REV terminal command ON starts jogging.
For the jogging by the keypad, the inverter jogs only when the
key decelerates to stop.
the
key is held down. Releasing
During jogging, the frequency specified by C20 (Jogging Frequency) and the
acceleration/deceleration time specified by H54 (ACC/DEC Time) apply.
• The inverter’s status transition between "ready for jogging" and "normal
operation" is possible only when the inverter is stopped.
• To start jogging operation by simultaneously entering the JOG terminal command
and a run command (e.g., FWD), the input delay time between the two commands
should be within 100 ms. If a run command FWD is entered first, the inverter does
not jog the motor but runs it ordinarily until the next input of the JOG.
„ Select frequency command 2/1 -- Hz2/Hz1 (Function code data = 11)
Turning this terminal command ON and OFF switches the frequency command source
between frequency command 1 (F01) and frequency command 2 (C30).
If no Hz2/Hz1 terminal command is assigned, the frequency sourced by F01 takes effect by
default.
Input terminal command
Hz2/Hz1
Frequency command source
OFF
Follow F01 (Frequency command 1)
ON
Follow C30 (Frequency command 2)
5-48
„
Select motor 2 / motor 1 -- M2/M1 (Function code data = 12)
Turning this terminal command ON switches from motor 1 to motor 2. Switching is possible
only when the inverter is stopped. Upon completion of switching, the digital terminal output
"Switched to motor 2" SWM2 (assigned to any of terminals [Y1] and [30A/B/C]) turns ON.
If no M2/M1 terminal command is assigned, motor 1 is selected by default.
Input terminal command
M2/M1
Selected motor
SWM2 status
after completion of switching
OFF
Motor 1
OFF
ON
Motor 2
ON
Switching between motors 1 and 2 automatically switches applicable function codes as listed
below. The inverter runs the motor with those codes that should be properly configured.
Function code name
For Motor 1
For Motor 2
Maximum Frequency
F03
A01
Base Frequency
F04
A02
Rated voltage at Base Frequency
F05
A03
Maximum Output Voltage
F06
A04
Torque Boost
F09
A05
Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor
F10
A06
(Overload detection level)
F11
A07
(Thermal time constant)
F12
A08
(Braking starting frequency)
F20
A09
(Braking level)
F21
A10
(Braking time)
F22
A11
Starting Frequency
F23
A12
Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation
F37
A13
Control Mode Selection
F42
A14
P02
A16
(Select motor characteristics)
DC Braking
Motor Parameters
(No. of poles)
(Rated current)
P03
A17
(Auto-tuning)
P04
A18
(No-load current)
P06
A20
(%R1)
P07
A21
(%X)
P08
A22
(Slip compensation gain for driving)
P09
A23
(Slip compensation response time)
P10
A24
(Slip compensation gain for braking)
P11
A25
(Rated slip frequency)
P12
A26
Motor Selection
P99
A39
Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor
H80
A41
Cumulative Motor Run Time
H94
A51
Startup Counter of Motor
H44
A52
5-49
Motor 2 imposes functional restrictions on the following function codes. Confirm the settings
of those function codes before use.
Functions
Related function
codes
Restrictions
Non-linear V/f pattern
Disabled. Linear V/f pattern only
Starting frequency
Starting frequency holding time not supported. F24
H50 to H53
Stop frequency
Stop frequency holding time not supported.
F39
Overload early warning
Disabled.
E34 and E35
UP/DOWN control
Disabled. Fixed at default setting 0.
H61
PID control
Disabled.
J01
Braking signal
Disabled.
J68 to J72
Software current limiter
Disabled.
F43 and F44
Rotation direction limitation
Disabled.
H08
To run the 2nd motor with the M2/M1 terminal command and a run command (e.g.,
FWD), the input of the M2/M1 should not be delayed 10 ms or more from that of the
run command. If the delay exceeds 10 ms, the 1st motor will be driven by default.
„ Enable DC braking -- DCBRK (Function code data = 13)
This terminal command gives the inverter a DC braking command through the inverter’s
digital input.
(Refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22.)
„ UP (Increase output frequency) and DOWN (Decrease output frequency) commands
-- UP and DOWN (Function code data = 17, 18)
• Frequency setting
When the UP/DOWN control is selected for frequency setting with a run command ON,
turning the UP or DOWN terminal command ON causes the output frequency to increase or
decrease, respectively, within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as listed below.
UP
DOWN
Data = 17
Data = 18
OFF
OFF
Keep the current output frequency.
ON
OFF
Increase the output frequency with the acceleration time
currently specified.
OFF
ON
Decrease the output frequency with the deceleration time
currently specified.
ON
ON
Keep the current output frequency.
Function
5-50
The UP/DOWN control is available in two modes--one mode (H61 = 0) in which the initial
value of the reference frequency is fixed to "0.00" at the start of the UP/DOWN control and the
other mode (H61 = 1) in which the reference frequency applied in the previous UP/DOWN
control applies as the initial value.
When H61 = 0, the reference frequency applied by the previous UP/DOWN control has been
cleared to "0," so at the next restart (including powering on), use the UP terminal command to
accelerate the speed as needed.
When H61 = 1, the inverter internally holds the current output frequency set by the UP/DOWN
control and applies the held frequency at the next restart (including powering on).
At the time of restart, if an UP or DOWN terminal command is entered before the
internal frequency reaches the output frequency saved in the memory, the inverter
saves the current output frequency into the memory and starts the UP/DOWN
control with the new frequency. The previous frequency held will be overwritten by
the current one.
Initial frequency for the UP/DOWN control when the frequency command source is switched
When the frequency command source is switched to the UP/DOWN control from other
sources, the initial frequency for the UP/DOWN control is as listed below:
Frequency command
source
Switching command
Initial frequency for UP/DOWN control
H61 = 0
H61 = 1
Other than UP/DOWN
(F01, C30)
Select frequency
command 2/1 (Hz2/Hz1)
Reference frequency given by the
frequency command source used just
before switching
PID conditioner
Cancel PID control
(Hz/PID)
Reference frequency given by PID control
(PID controller output)
Multistep frequency
Select multistep
frequency (SS1, SS2,
SS4 and SS8)
Communications link
Enable communications
link via RS-485 (LE)
Reference
frequency given
by the frequency
command source
used just before
switching
Reference
frequency at the
time of previous
UP/DOWN control
To enable the UP and DOWN terminal commands, you need to set frequency
command 1 (F01) or frequency command 2 (C30) to "7" beforehand.
5-51
„
Enable communications link via RS-485 -- LE
(Function code data = 24)
Turning this terminal command ON assigns priorities to frequency commands or run
commands received via the RS-485 communications link (H30).
No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON. (Refer to the description of
H30.)
„ Run forward -- FWD (Function code data = 98)
Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction; turning it OFF
decelerates it to stop.
This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99.
„ Run reverse -- REV (Function code data = 99)
Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction; turning it OFF
decelerates it to stop.
E20
E27
This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99.
Terminal [Y1] Function
Terminal [30A/B/C] Function (Relay output)
E20 and E27 assign output signals (listed on the next page) to general-purpose,
programmable output terminals [Y1] and [30A/B/C]. These function codes can also switch the
logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so
that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as active. The
factory default settings are "Active ON."
Terminal [Y1] is a transistor output and terminals [30A/B/C] are relay contact outputs. In
normal logic, if an alarm occurs, the relay will be energized so that [30A] and [30C] will be
closed, and [30B] and [30C] opened. In negative logic, the relay will be deenergized so that
[30A] and [30C] will be opened, and [30B] and [30C] closed. This may be useful for the
implementation of failsafe power systems.
• When a negative logic is employed, all output signals are active (e.g. an alarm
would be recognized) while the inverter is powered OFF. To avoid causing
system malfunctions by this, interlock these signals to keep them ON using an
external power supply. Furthermore, the validity of these output signals is not
guaranteed for approximately 1.5 seconds after power-on, so introduce such a
mechanism that masks them during the transient period.
• Terminals [30A/B/C] use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent
ON/OFF switching. Where frequent ON/OFF switching is anticipated (for
example, limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit
control such as switching to commercial power line), use transistor output [Y1]
instead. The service life of a relay is approximately 200,000 times if it is switched
ON and OFF at one-second intervals.
5-52
The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals [Y1] and [30A/B/C].
To make the explanations simpler, the examples shown below are all written for the normal
logic (Active ON).
Function code data
Active ON
Functions assigned
Active OFF
Symbol
0
1000
Inverter running
RUN
1
1001
Frequency arrival signal
FAR
2
1002
Frequency detected
FDT
3
1003
Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped)
LU
5
1005
Inverter output limiting
IOL
6
1006
Auto-restarting after momentary power failure
IPF
7
1007
Motor overload early warning
OL
26
1026
Auto-resetting
TRY
30
1030
Service lifetime alarm
LIFE
35
1035
Inverter running 2
RUN2
36
1036
Overload prevention control
37
1037
Current detected
ID
38
1038
Current detected 2
ID2
41
1041
Low current detected
43
1043
Under PID control
PID-CTL
44
1044
Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID
control
PID-STP
49
1049
Switched to motor 2
56
1056
Motor overheat detected by thermistor (PTC)
57
1057
Brake signal
BRKS
C1OFF
59
1059
Terminal [C1] wire break
84
1084
Maintenance timer
87
1087
Frequency arrival detected
99
1099
Alarm output (for any alarm)
OLP
IDL
SWM2
THM
MNT
FARFDT
ALM
„ Inverter running -- RUN (Function code data = 0)
This output signal tells the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting
frequency or higher. It comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the starting frequency,
and it goes OFF when it is less than the stop frequency. It is also OFF when the DC braking is
in operation.
If this signal is assigned in negative logic (Active OFF), it can be used as a signal indicating
"Inverter being stopped."
„ Frequency arrival signal -- FAR (Function code data = 1)
This output signal comes ON when the difference between the output frequency and
reference frequency comes within the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30.
(Refer to the description of E30.)
5-53
„ Frequency detected -- FDT (Function code data = 2)
This output signal comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection
level specified by E31, and it goes OFF when the output frequency drops below the
"Frequency detection level (E31) - Hysteresis width (E32)."
„ Undervoltage detected -- LU (Function code data = 3)
This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the
specified undervoltage level, and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level.
This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor
is in an abnormal stop state (e.g., tripped).
When this signal is ON, a run command is disabled if given.
„ Inverter output limiting -- IOL (Function code data = 5)
This output signal comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating
any of the following actions (minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms).
• Current limiting by software (F43 and F44)
• Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware (H12 = 1)
• Automatic deceleration (Anti-regenerative control) (H69 = 2 or 4)
When the IOL signal is ON, the output frequency may have deviated from the
specified frequency because of the limiting function above.
„ Auto-restarting after momentary power failure -- IPF (Function code data = 6)
This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or
during the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition and shut
down the output until restart has been completed (the output has reached the reference
frequency).
To enable this IPF signal, set F14 (Restart mode after momentary power failure) to "4" (Enable
restart (Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred)) or "5" (Enable restart
(Restart at the starting frequency)) beforehand.
„ Motor overload early warning -- OL (Function code data = 7)
This output signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning that enables you to take an
corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm 0l1 and shuts down its
output. (Refer to the description of E34.)
„ Service lifetime alarm -- LIFE (Function code data = 30)
This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors
(DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit board) and cooling fan
has expired.
This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan. If this
signal comes ON, use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these
parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not.
For details about the judgment on service life, refer to Table 7.3 "Criteria for Issuing a
Lifetime Alarm" in Chapter 7, Section 7.3 "List of Periodical Replacement Parts."
5-54
„ Inverter running 2 -- RUN2 (Function code data = 35)
This signal acts in the same way as RUN (Function code data = 0) except that RUN2 is ON
even when the DC braking is in operation.
„ Overload prevention control -- OLP (Function code data = 36)
This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated. The minimum
ON-duration is 100 ms. (Refer to the description of H70.)
„ Current detected and Current detected 2 -- ID and ID2 (Function code data = 37, 38)
The ID or ID2 output signal comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the
level specified by E34 (Current detection (Level)) or E37 (Current detection 2 (Level)) for the
time longer than the one specified by E35 (Current detection (Timer)) or E38 (Current
detection 2 (Timer)), respectively. The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.
The ID or ID2 goes OFF when the output current drops below 90% of the rated operation
level.
These two output signals can be assigned to two different digital output terminals
independently if necessary.
Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning OL, but
also for the operation level of the current detection ID. (Refer to the description of
E34.)
„ Low current detected -- IDL (Function code data = 41)
This output signal comes ON when the inverter output current drops below the low current
detection level (E34) and it remains at the low level for the timer period (E35). When the
output current exceeds the current detection level (E37) by 5% or more of the inverter rated
current, this signal goes OFF. The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms. (Refer to the description
of E34.)
„ Under PID control -- PID-CTL (Function code data = 43)
This output signal comes ON when PID control is enabled ("Cancel PID control" (Hz/PID) =
OFF) and a run command is ON. (Refer to the description of J01.)
„ Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control -- PID-STP (Function code data = 44)
This output signal comes ON when the inverter is stopped by the slow flowrate stop function
under PID control. (Refer to the descriptions of J15 through J17.)
When PID control is enabled, the inverter may stop due to the slow flowrate stop
function or other reasons, with the PID-CTL signal being ON. As long as the
PID-CTL signal is ON, PID control is effective, so the inverter may abruptly resume
its operation, depending on the PID feedback value.
When PID control is enabled, even if the inverter stops its output during operation because of
sensor signals or other reasons, operation will resume automatically.
Design your machinery so that safety is ensured even in such cases.
Otherwise, an accident could occur.
5-55
„ Switched to motor 2 -- SWM2 (Function code data = 49)
This output signal comes ON when motor 2 is selected with the M2/M1 terminal command
assigned to a digital input terminal. For details, refer to the descriptions of E01 through E03
(Function code data = 12).
„ Motor overheat detected by thermistor (PTC) -- THM (Function code data = 56)
When the thermistor is enabled (H26 = 2), this output signal comes ON if the motor
temperature rises to the protection trigger level specified by H27.
„ Brake signal -- BRKS (Function code data = 57)
This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake.
„ Terminal [C1] wire break -- C1OFF (Function code data = 59)
When terminal [C1] is used for a feedback signal under PID control, this output signal comes
ON if the [C1] wire breaks, thereby enabling it to activate the protection function.
„ Frequency arrival detected -- FARFDT (Function code data = 87)
The FARFDT, which is an ANDed signal of FAR and FDT, comes ON when both signal
conditions are met.
„ Alarm output (for any alarm) -- ALM (Function code data = 99)
This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter
enters Alarm mode.
E30
Frequency Arrival (Hysteresis width for FAR)
E30 specifies the detection level (hysteresis width) for FAR ("Frequency arrival signal").
The moment the output frequency reaches the zone defined by "Reference frequency ±
Hysteresis width specified by E30," the FAR comes ON.
The operation timings of signals are shown in the graph below.
5-56
E34, E35
E37, E38
Overload Early Warning/Low Current Detection (Level and Timer)
Current Detection 2 (Level and Timer)
These function codes define the detection level and timer for the OL ("Motor overload early
warning"), ID ("Current detected"), ID2 ("Current detected 2") and IDL ("Low current
detected") output signals.
Output
signal
Data
assigned
to output
terminal
OL
ID
ID2
IDL
7
37
38
41
Detection level
Timer
Range:
See below
E34
E34
E37
E34
Range:
0.01 to 600.00 s
-E35
E38
E35
Motor
characteristics
Range:
See below
F10
Thermal time
constant
Range:
0.5 to 75.0 min
F12
--
--
- Data setting range
Operation level: 0.00 (Disable), 1 to 200% of inverter rated current
Motor characteristics 1: Enable (For a general-purpose motor and Fuji standard
permanent magnet synchronous motor with shaft-driven cooling
fan)
2: Enable (For an inverter-driven motor with separately powered
cooling fan)
„ Motor overload early warning signal -- OL
The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition (alarm code 0l1 ) of the
motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens.
The OL signal turns ON when the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by
E34. In typical cases, set E34 data to 80 to 90% against F11 data (Electronic thermal overload
protection for motor 1, Overload detection level). Specify also the thermal characteristics of
the motor with F10 (Select motor characteristics) and F12 (Thermal time constant). To utilize
this feature, you need to assign OL (data = 7) to any of the digital output terminals.
„ Current detected and Current detected 2 signals -- ID and ID2
When the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 or E37 and it
continues longer than the period specified by E35 or E38, the ID or ID2 signal turns ON,
respectively. When the output current drops below 90% of the rated operation level, the ID or
ID2 turns OFF. (Minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms)
To utilize this feature, you need to assign ID (data = 37) or ID2 (data = 38) to any of digital
output terminals.
5-57
„ Low current detected -- IDL
This signal turns ON when the output current drops below the low current detection level
(E34) and remains at the low level for the timer period (E35). When the output current
exceeds the "Low current detection level plus 5% of the inverter rated current," it goes OFF.
(The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.)
E39
E50
Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time
Coefficient for Speed Indication
E39 and E50 specify coefficients for determining the constant feeding rate time, load shaft
speed, and line speed, as well as for displaying the output status monitored.
Calculation expression
Constant feeding rate time (min) =
Coefficient for speed indication (E50)
Frequency × Coefficient for constant feeding rate time (E39)
Load shaft speed = Coefficient for speed indication (E50) × Frequency (Hz)
Line speed = Coefficient for speed indication (E50) × Frequency (Hz)
Where, the "frequency" refers to the "reference frequency" to be applied for settings (constant
feeding rate time, load shaft speed, or line speed), or to the "output frequency before slip
compensation" to be applied for monitor.
If the constant feeding rate time is 999.9 min. or more or the denominator of the right-hand
side is zero (0), "999.9" appears.
E51
Display Coefficient for Input Watt-hour Data
Use this coefficient (multiplication factor) for displaying the input watt-hour data (5_10 ) in a
part of maintenance information on the keypad.
Input watt-hour data = Display coefficient (E51 data) × Input watt-hour (kWh)
Setting E51 data to 0.000 clears the input watt-hour and its data to "0." After
clearing, be sure to restore E51 data to the previous value; otherwise, input
watt-hour data will not be accumulated.
5-58
E52
Keypad (Menu display mode)
E52 provides a choice of three menu display modes for the keypad as listed below.
Data for E52
0
Menu display mode
Menus to be displayed
Function code data editing mode
Menu #1
1
Function code data check mode
Menu #2
2
Full-menu mode
Menus #1 through #6 *
* Menus #1 through #7 when a remote keypad is connected.
Selecting the full-menu mode (E52 = 2) allows you to cycle through the menus with
the
or
key and select the desired menu item with the
key. Once the entire
menu has been cycled through, the display returns to the first menu item.
E60
E61
E62
Built-in Potentiometer (Function selection)
Terminal [12] Extended Function
Terminal [C1] Extended Function
E60 through E62 define the property of the built-in potentiometer and terminals [12] and [C1],
respectively.
There is no need to set up the potentiometer and terminals if they are to be used for frequency
command sources.
Data for E60,
E61, or E62
0
Function
Description
None
--
1
Auxiliary frequency
command 1
This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be added to
frequency command 1 (F01). It is never added to
frequency command 2, multistep frequency command or
other frequency commands.
2
Auxiliary frequency
command 2
This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be added to
all frequency commands including frequency command
1, frequency command 2 and multistep frequency
commands.
3
PID command 1
This input includes temperature, pressure or other
commands to apply under the PID control.
Function code J02 should be also configured.
5
PID feedback amount
This input includes the feedback of the temperature or
pressure under the PID control. (Not available for E60.)
If the built-in potentiometer and different terminals have been set up to have the
same data, the operation priority is given in the following order:
E60 > E61 > E62
Selecting the UP/DOWN control (F01, C30 = 7) ignores auxiliary frequency
command 1 and 2.
5-59
C21
Timer Operation
C21 enables or disables a timer operation that is triggered by a run command and continues
for the timer count previously specified with the
/
keys. The operating procedure for the
timer operation is given below.
Data for C21
Function
0
Disable timer operation
1
Enable timer operation
• Pressing the
key during timer countdown quits the timer operation.
• Even if C21 = 1, setting the timer to 0 no longer starts the timer operation with the
key.
• Applying terminal command FWD or REV instead of the key command can also
start the timer operation.
Operating procedure for timer operation (example)
Preparation
• To display the timer count on the LED monitor, set E43 (LED Monitor) to "13" (Timer) and
set C21 (Timer Operation) to "1" (Enable).
• Specify the reference frequency to apply to timer operation. When the keypad is selected
as a frequency command source, press the
key to shift to the speed monitor and
specify the desired reference frequency.
Triggering the timer operation with the
key
(1) While watching the timer count displayed on the LED monitor, press the
/
key to set
the timer for the desired count in seconds. Note that the timer count on the LED monitor
appears as an integral number without a decimal point.
(2) Press the
key. The motor starts running and the timer starts counting down. If the timer
counts down, the motor stops without pressing the
key. (Even if the LED monitor
displays any item except the timer count, the timer operation is possible.)
After the countdown of the timer operation triggered by a terminal command such
as FWD, the inverter decelerates to stop and at that moment the LED monitor
displays end and any LED monitor item (0 for the timer count) alternately. Turning
FWD OFF returns to the LED monitor item.
C33
C38
Analog Input Adjustment for Terminal [12] (Filter time constant)
Analog Input Adjustment for Terminal [C1] (Filter time constant)
C33 and C38 configure a filter time constant for an analog voltage and current input on
terminals [12] and [C1], respectively.
The larger the time constant, the slower the response. Specify the proper filter time constant
taking into account the response speed of the machine (load). If the input voltage fluctuates
due to line noise, remove the cause of the noise or take an electric circuit related measure.
Only when no effect is obtained, increase the time constant.
5-60
P02
Motor 1 (Rated capacity)
P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor. Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of
the motor.
Data for P02
Unit
0.01 to 30.00
P03
Remarks
kW
When P99 = 0, 3, 4, 20 or 21
HP
When P99 = 1
Motor 1 (Rated current)
P03 specifies the rated current of the motor. Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of
the motor.
P04
Motor 1 (Auto-tuning)
The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal
memory. Basically, it is not necessary to perform tuning when using a Fuji standard motor with
a standard connection with the inverter.
In any of the following cases, perform auto-tuning since the motor parameters are different
from those of Fuji standard motors so as not to obtain the best performance under each of
these controls-- auto torque boost, torque calculation monitoring, auto energy saving
operation, automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control), slip compensation, and torque
vector control.
• The motor to be driven is made by other manufacturer or is a non-standard motor.
• Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long.
• A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter.
For details of auto-tuning, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.1.3 "Preparation before a test
run--Configuring function code data."
P06, P07
P08, P12
Motor 1 (No-load current, %R1, %X and Motor 1, Rated slip frequency)
P06 through P08 and P12 specify no-load current, %R1, %X, and rated slip frequency,
respectively. Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the
manufacturer of the motor.
Performing auto-tuning automatically sets these parameters.
„ No-load current (P06): Enter the value obtained from the motor manufacturer.
„ %R1 (P07):
Enter the value calculated by the following expression.
R1 + Cable R1
%R1 =
× 100 (%)
V / ( 3× I )
where,
R1: Primary resistance of the motor (Ω)
Cable R1: Resistance of the output cable (Ω)
V: Rated voltage of the motor (V)
I: Rated current of the motor (A)
5-61
„ %X (P08): Enter the value calculated by the following expression.
%X =
X1 + X2 × XM / (X2 + XM) + Cable X
× 100 (%)
V / ( 3 ×I )
where,
X1: Primary leakage reactance of the motor (Ω)
X2: Secondary leakage reactance of the motor (converted to primary) (Ω)
XM: Exciting reactance of the motor (Ω)
Cable X: Reactance of the output cable (Ω)
V: Rated voltage of the motor (V)
I: Rated current of the motor (A)
„ Rated slip frequency (P12)
Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following expression
and enter the converted value. (Note: The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes
shows a larger value.)
(Synchronous speed - Rated speed)
Rated slip frequency (Hz) =
x Base frequency
Synchronous speed
For reactance, choose the value at the base frequency 1 (F04).
P09
P10
P11
Motor 1 (Slip compensation gain for driving)
(Slip compensation response time)
(Slip compensation gain for braking)
P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in % for driving and braking individually.
Specification of 100% fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor. Excessive
compensation (P09, P11 > 100%) may cause a system oscillation, so carefully check the
operation on the actual machine.
P10 determines the response time for slip compensation. Basically, there is no need to modify
the default setting. If you need to modify it, consult your Fuji Electric representatives.
5-62
P99
Motor 1 Selection
P99 specifies the type of motor 1 to be used.
Data for P99
Motor type
0
Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard IM, 8-series)
1
Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating IM. Typical in North America)
3
Motor characteristics 3 (Fuji standard IM, 6-series)
4
Other motors (IM)
20
Other motors (PMSM)
21
Fuji standard PMSM without sensor (GNB series)
Automatic control (such as auto torque boost and auto energy saving) or electronic thermal
overload protection for motor uses the motor parameters and characteristics. To match the
property of a control system with that of the motor, select characteristics of the motor and set
H03 data (Data Initialization) to "2" to initialize the motor parameters stored in the inverter. The
initialization automatically updates the P03 and P06 to P12 data and the constants used
inside the inverter.
According to the motor model, set the P99 data as shown below.
•
•
•
•
For Fuji standard IM, 8-series (Current standard induction motors), P99 = 0
For Fuji standard IM, 6-series (Conventional standard induction motors), P99 = 3
For other manufacturers' IM or model-unknown IM, P99 =4
For PMSM, P99 = 20 or 21 (to be selected after consultation with motor manufacturers)
• When P99 = 4, the inverter runs following the motor characteristics of Fuji
standard IM, 8-series.
• When P99 = 1, the inverter applies to the characteristics of HP rating IM (Typical
in North America).
5-63
H03
Data Initialization
H03 initializes the current function code data to the factory defaults or initializes the motor
parameters.
To change the H03 data, it is necessary to press the
(simultaneous keying).
Data for H03
0
1
+
keys or
+
keys
Function
Disable initialization
(Settings manually made by the user will be retained.)
Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults
Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 (Rated capacity) and
P99 (Motor 1 selection)
2
Function codes subject to initialization: P03, P06 to P12 and constants for
internal control
(These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the
following pages.)
Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 (Rated capacity) and
A39 (Motor 2 selection)
3
Function codes subject to initialization: A17, A20 to A26 and constants for
internal control
(These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the
following pages.)
• To initialize the motor parameters, set the related function codes using the following steps.
1) P02/A16
Motor (Rated capacity)
Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW.
2) P99/A39
Motor Selection
Select the characteristics of the motor.
3) H03 Data Initialization
Initialize the motor parameters. (H03 = 2 or 3)
4) P03/A17
Motor (Rated current)
Set the rated current on the nameplate if the already set data
differs from the rated current printed on the nameplate of the
motor.
• Upon completion of the initialization, the H03 data reverts to "0" (factory default).
• If the P02 or A16 data is set to a value other than the nominal applied motor rating, data
initialization with H03 internally converts the specified value forcedly to the equivalent
nominal applied motor rating (see the tables on the next page).
• When a PMSM is selected (P99 = 20 or 21), initializing motor parameters by setting the H03
data to "2" reverts function code data for both IM and PMSM to factory defaults.
5-64
„ When Fuji standard 8-series IM (P99 = 0 or A39 = 0) or other motors (P99 = 4 or A39 = 4)
are selected, the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables.
200 V class series for Asia version (FRN_ _ _ _C2S-2A, FRN_ _ _ _C2S-7A)
220 V, 60 Hz, rated voltage, base frequency, Fuji standard 8-series
Motor capacity
(kW)
P02/A16
Nominal
applied
motor
(kW)
Rated
current
(A)
No-load
current
(A)
%R
(%)
%X
(%)
Rated slip
frequency
(Hz)
P03/A17
P06/A20
P07/A21
P08/A22
P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09
0.06
0.40
0.37
11.40
9.71
1.77
0.10 to 0.19
0.1
0.62
0.50
10.74
10.50
1.77
0.20 to 0.39
0.2
1.18
0.97
10.69
10.66
2.33
0.40 to 0.74
0.4
2.10
1.52
8.47
11.34
2.40
0.75 to 1.49
0.75
3.29
2.11
7.20
8.94
2.33
1.50 to 2.19
1.5
5.56
2.76
5.43
9.29
2.00
2.20 to 3.69
2.2
8.39
4.45
5.37
9.09
1.80
3.70 to 5.49
3.7
13.67
7.03
4.80
9.32
1.93
5.50 to 7.49
5.5
20.50
10.08
4.37
11.85
1.40
7.50 to 10.99
7.5
26.41
11.46
3.73
12.15
1.57
38.24
16.23
3.13
12.49
1.07
11.00 to 14.99
11
15.00 to 18.49
15
50.05
18.33
2.69
13.54
1.13
18.50 to 21.99
18.5
60.96
19.62
2.42
13.71
0.87
22.00 to 29.99
22
70.97
23.01
2.23
13.24
0.90
30.00
30
97.38
35.66
2.18
12.38
0.80
400 V class series for Asia version (FRN_ _ _ _C2S-4A)
380 V, 60 Hz, rated voltage, base frequency, Fuji standard 8-series
Motor capacity
(kW)
P02/A16
Nominal
applied
motor
(kW)
Rated
current
(A)
No-load
current
(A)
%R
(%)
%X
(%)
Rated slip
frequency
(Hz)
P03/A17
P06/A20
P07/A21
P08/A22
P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09
0.06
0.19
0.16
12.54
10.68
1.77
0.10 to 0.19
0.10
0.31
0.21
12.08
11.81
1.77
0.20 to 0.39
0.20
0.58
0.42
12.16
12.14
2.33
0.40 to 0.74
0.4
1.07
0.66
9.99
13.38
2.40
0.75 to 1.49
0.75
1.72
0.91
8.72
10.82
2.33
1.50 to 2.19
1.5
3.10
1.20
6.89
11.80
2.00
2.20 to 3.69
2.2
4.54
1.92
6.73
11.40
1.80
3.70 to 5.49
3.7
7.43
3.04
6.04
11.73
1.93
5.50 to 7.49
5.5
11.49
4.35
5.55
15.05
1.40
7.50 to 10.99
7.5
14.63
4.95
4.78
15.59
1.57
11.00 to 14.99
11
21.23
7.01
4.02
16.06
1.07
15.00 to 18.49
15
28.11
7.92
3.50
17.61
1.13
18.50 to 21.99
18.5
35.04
8.47
3.16
17.97
0.87
22.00 to 29.99
22
40.11
9.98
2.92
17.32
0.90
30.00
30
55.21
15.44
2.84
16.10
0.80
5-65
200 V class series for China version (FRN_ _ _ _C2S-7C)
200 V, 50 Hz, rated voltage, base frequency, Fuji standard 8-series
Motor capacity
(kW)
P02/A16
Nominal
applied
motor
(kW)
Rated
current
(A)
No-load
current
(A)
%R
(%)
%X
(%)
Rated slip
frequency
(Hz)
P03/A17
P06/A20
P07/A21
P08/A22
P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09
0.06
0.44
0.40
13.79
11.75
1.77
0.10 to 0.19
0.1
0.68
0.55
12.96
12.67
1.77
0.20 to 0.39
0.2
1.30
1.06
12.95
12.92
2.33
0.40 to 0.74
0.4
2.30
1.66
10.20
13.66
2.40
0.75 to 1.49
0.75
3.60
2.30
8.67
10.76
2.33
1.50 to 2.19
1.5
6.10
3.01
6.55
11.21
2.00
2.20 to 3.69
2.2
9.20
4.85
6.48
10.97
1.80
3.70 to 5.49
3.7
15.00
7.67
5.79
11.25
1.93
5.50 to 7.49
5.5
22.50
11.00
5.28
14.31
1.40
29.00
12.50
4.50
14.68
1.57
11.00 to 14.99
7.50 to 10.99
11
7.5
42.00
17.70
3.78
15.09
1.07
15.00 to 18.49
15
55.00
20.00
3.25
16.37
1.13
18.50 to 21.99
18.5
67.00
21.40
2.92
16.58
0.87
22.00 to 29.99
22
78.00
25.10
2.70
16.00
0.90
30.00
30
38.90
2.64
14.96
0.80
107.0
400 V class series for China version (FRN_ _ _ _C2S-4C)
380 V, 50 Hz, rated voltage, base frequency, Fuji standard 8-series
Motor capacity
(kW)
P02/A16
Nominal
applied
motor
(kW)
Rated
current
(A)
No-load
current
(A)
%R
(%)
%X
(%)
Rated slip
frequency
(Hz)
P03/A17
P06/A20
P07/A21
P08/A22
P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09
0.06
0.21
0.19
13.86
11.81
1.77
0.10 to 0.19
0.10
0.34
0.26
13.25
12.96
1.77
0.20 to 0.39
0.20
0.64
0.50
13.42
13.39
2.33
0.40 to 0.74
0.4
1.15
0.79
10.74
14.38
2.40
0.75 to 1.49
0.75
1.82
1.09
9.23
11.45
2.33
1.50 to 2.19
1.5
3.20
1.43
7.12
12.18
2.00
2.20 to 3.69
2.2
4.72
2.31
7.00
11.85
1.80
3.70 to 5.49
3.7
7.70
3.65
6.26
12.16
1.93
5.50 to 7.49
5.5
11.84
5.23
5.72
15.51
1.40
7.50 to 10.99
7.5
15.00
5.94
4.90
15.98
1.57
11.00 to 14.99
11
21.73
8.41
4.12
16.44
1.07
15.00 to 18.49
15
28.59
9.50
3.56
17.92
1.13
18.50 to 21.99
18.5
35.46
10.17
3.21
18.20
0.87
22.00 to 29.99
22
40.66
11.97
2.96
17.56
0.90
30.00
30
56.15
18.53
2.89
16.37
0.80
5-66
200 V class series for Europe version (FRN_ _ _ _C2S-7E)
230 V, 50 Hz, rated voltage, base frequency, Fuji standard 8-series
Motor capacity
(kW)
P02/A16
Nominal
applied
motor
(kW)
Rated
current
(A)
No-load
current
(A)
%R
(%)
%X
(%)
Rated slip
frequency
(Hz)
P03/A17
P06/A20
P07/A21
P08/A22
P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09
0.06
0.49
0.46
13.35
11.38
1.77
0.10 to 0.19
0.1
0.73
0.63
12.10
11.83
1.77
0.20 to 0.39
0.2
1.38
1.22
11.95
11.93
2.33
0.40 to 0.74
0.4
2.36
1.91
9.10
12.19
2.40
0.75 to 1.49
0.75
3.58
2.65
7.50
9.30
2.33
1.50 to 2.19
1.5
5.77
3.46
5.39
9.22
2.00
2.20 to 3.69
2.2
8.80
5.58
5.39
9.12
1.80
3.70 to 5.49
3.7
14.26
8.82
4.79
9.30
1.93
5.50 to 7.49
5.5
21.25
12.65
4.34
11.75
1.40
7.50 to 10.99
7.5
26.92
14.38
3.63
11.85
1.57
38.87
20.36
3.04
12.14
1.07
11.00 to 14.99
11
15.00 to 18.49
15
50.14
23.00
2.58
12.98
1.13
18.50 to 21.99
18.5
60.45
24.61
2.29
13.01
0.87
22.00 to 29.99
22
70.40
28.87
2.12
12.56
0.90
30.00
30
97.54
44.74
2.09
11.86
0.80
400 V class series for Europe version (FRN_ _ _ _C2S-4E)
400 V, 50 Hz, rated voltage, base frequency, Fuji standard 8-series
Motor capacity
(kW)
P02/A16
Nominal
applied
motor
(kW)
Rated
current
(A)
No-load
current
(A)
%R
(%)
%X
(%)
Rated slip
frequency
(Hz)
P03/A17
P06/A20
P07/A21
P08/A22
P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09
0.06
0.22
0.20
13.79
11.75
1.77
0.10 to 0.19
0.10
0.35
0.27
12.96
12.67
1.77
0.20 to 0.39
0.20
0.65
0.53
12.95
12.92
2.33
0.40 to 0.74
0.4
1.15
0.83
10.20
13.66
2.40
0.75 to 1.49
0.75
1.80
1.15
8.67
10.76
2.33
1.50 to 2.19
1.5
3.10
1.51
6.55
11.21
2.00
2.20 to 3.69
2.2
4.60
2.43
6.48
10.97
1.80
3.70 to 5.49
3.7
7.50
3.84
5.79
11.25
1.93
5.50 to 7.49
5.5
11.50
5.50
5.28
14.31
1.40
7.50 to 10.99
7.5
14.50
6.25
4.50
14.68
1.57
11.00 to 14.99
11
21.00
8.85
3.78
15.09
1.07
15.00 to 18.49
15
27.50
10.00
3.25
16.37
1.13
18.50 to 21.99
18.5
34.00
10.70
2.92
16.58
0.87
22.00 to 29.99
22
39.00
12.60
2.70
16.00
0.90
30.00
30
54.00
19.50
2.64
14.96
0.80
5-67
200 V class series for USA version (FRN_ _ _ _C2S-2U, FRN_ _ _ _C2S-7U)
230 V, 60 Hz, rated voltage, base frequency, Fuji standard 8-series
Motor capacity
(kW)
P02/A16
Nominal
applied
motor
(kW)
Rated
current
(A)
No-load
current
(A)
%R
(%)
%X
(%)
Rated slip
frequency
(Hz)
P03/A17
P06/A20
P07/A21
P08/A22
P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09
0.06
0.42
0.38
11.45
9.75
1.77
0.10 to 0.19
0.1
0.63
0.53
10.44
10.21
1.77
0.20 to 0.39
0.2
1.21
1.02
10.48
10.46
2.33
0.40 to 0.74
0.4
2.11
1.59
8.14
10.90
2.40
0.75 to 1.49
0.75
3.27
2.20
6.85
8.50
2.33
1.50 to 2.19
1.5
5.44
2.88
5.08
8.69
2.00
2.20 to 3.69
2.2
8.24
4.65
5.05
8.54
1.80
3.70 to 5.49
3.7
13.40
7.35
4.50
8.74
1.93
5.50 to 7.49
5.5
20.06
10.54
4.09
11.09
1.40
7.50 to 10.99
7.5
25.72
11.98
3.47
11.32
1.57
11.00 to 14.99
11
37.21
16.96
2.91
11.63
1.07
15.00 to 18.49
15
48.50
19.17
2.49
12.55
1.13
18.50 to 21.99
18.5
58.90
20.51
2.23
12.68
0.87
22.00 to 29.99
22
68.57
24.05
2.06
12.23
0.90
30.00
30
94.36
37.28
2.02
11.47
0.80
400 V class series for USA version (FRN_ _ _ _C2S-4U)
460 V, 60 Hz, rated voltage, base frequency, Fuji standard 8-series
Motor capacity
(kW)
P02/A16
Nominal
applied
motor
(kW)
Rated
current
(A)
No-load
current
(A)
%R
(%)
%X
(%)
Rated slip
frequency
(Hz)
P03/A17
P06/A20
P07/A21
P08/A22
P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09
0.06
0.21
0.19
11.45
9.75
1.77
0.10 to 0.19
0.10
0.32
0.26
10.30
10.07
1.77
0.20 to 0.39
0.20
0.61
0.51
10.57
10.54
2.33
0.40 to 0.74
0.4
1.06
0.80
8.18
10.95
2.40
0.75 to 1.49
0.75
1.63
1.10
6.83
8.47
2.33
1.50 to 2.19
1.5
2.76
1.45
5.07
8.68
2.00
2.20 to 3.69
2.2
4.12
2.33
5.05
8.54
1.80
3.70 to 5.49
3.7
6.70
3.68
4.50
8.74
1.93
5.50 to 7.49
5.5
10.24
5.27
4.09
11.08
1.40
7.50 to 10.99
7.5
12.86
5.99
3.47
11.32
1.57
11.00 to 14.99
11
18.60
8.48
2.91
11.62
1.07
15.00 to 18.49
15
24.25
9.58
2.49
12.55
1.13
18.50 to 21.99
18.5
29.88
10.25
2.23
12.67
0.87
22.00 to 29.99
22
34.29
12.08
2.06
12.23
0.90
30.00
30
47.61
18.69
2.02
11.47
0.80
5-68
„ When HP rating IM (P99 = 1 or A39 = 1) is selected, the motor parameters are as listed in
the following tables. (HP refers to horse power that is used mainly in North America as a
unit of motor capacity.)
200 V class series for all destinations
230V, 60 Hz, rated voltage, base frequency
Motor capacity
(kW)
P02/A16
Nominal
applied
motor
(kW)
Rated
current
(A)
No-load
current
(A)
%R
(%)
%X
(%)
Rated slip
frequency
(Hz)
P03/A17
P06/A20
P07/A21
P08/A22
P12/A26
0.01 to 0.11
0.10
0.44
0.40
13.79
11.75
2.50
0.12 to 0.24
0.12
0.68
0.55
12.96
12.67
2.50
0.25 to 0.49
0.25
1.40
1.12
11.02
13.84
2.50
0.50 to 0.99
0.5
2.00
1.22
6.15
8.80
2.50
1.00 to 1.99
1
3.00
1.54
3.96
8.86
2.50
2.00 to 2.99
2
5.80
2.80
4.29
7.74
2.50
3.00 to 4.99
3
7.90
3.57
3.15
20.81
1.17
5.00 to 7.49
5
12.60
4.78
3.34
23.57
1.50
7.5
18.60
6.23
2.65
28.91
1.17
10.00 to 14.99
7.50 to 9.99
10
25.30
8.75
2.43
30.78
1.17
15.00 to 19.99
15
37.30
12.70
2.07
29.13
1.00
20.00 to 24.99
20
49.10
9.20
2.09
29.53
1.00
25.00 to 29.99
25
60.00
16.70
1.75
31.49
1.00
30.00 to 39.99
30
72.40
19.80
1.90
32.55
1.00
400 V class series for all destinations
460V, 60 Hz, rated voltage, base frequency
Motor capacity
(kW)
P02/A16
Nominal
applied
motor
(kW)
Rated
current
(A)
No-load
current
(A)
%R
(%)
%X
(%)
Rated slip
frequency
(Hz)
P03/A17
P06/A20
P07/A21
P08/A22
P12/A26
0.01 to 0.11
0.10
0.22
0.20
13.79
11.75
2.50
0.12 to 0.24
0.12
0.34
0.27
12.96
12.67
2.50
0.25 to 0.49
0.25
0.70
0.56
11.02
13.84
2.50
0.50 to 0.99
0.5
1.00
0.61
6.15
8.80
2.50
1.00 to 1.99
1
1.50
0.77
3.96
8.86
2.50
2.00 to 2.99
2
2.90
1.40
4.29
7.74
2.50
3.00 to 4.99
3
4.00
1.79
3.15
20.81
1.17
5.00 to 7.49
5
6.30
2.39
3.34
23.57
1.50
7.50 to 9.99
7.5
9.30
3.12
2.65
28.91
1.17
10.00 to 14.99
10
12.70
4.37
2.43
30.78
1.17
15.00 to 19.99
15
18.70
6.36
2.07
29.13
1.00
20.00 to 24.99
20
24.60
4.60
2.09
29.53
1.00
25.00 to 29.99
25
30.00
8.33
1.75
31.49
1.00
30.00 to 39.99
30
36.20
9.88
1.90
32.55
1.00
5-69
H04, H05
Auto-reset (Times and Reset interval)
H04 and H05 specify the auto-reset function that makes the inverter automatically attempt to
reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm (for any faults) even if any
protective function subject to reset is activated and the inverter enters the forced-to-stop state
(tripped state).
If the protective function works in excess of the times specified by H04, the inverter will issue
an alarm (for any faults) and not attempt to auto-reset the tripped state.
Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses to be retried.
Alarm status
Overcurrent protection
Overvoltage protection
LED monitor displays:
0c1, 0c2 or 0c3
0u1, 0u2 or 0u3
Heat sink overheated
Braking resistor
overheated
0h1
Alarm status
LED monitor displays:
Motor overheated
0h4
0l1 or 0l2
Motor overloaded
Inverter overloaded
0lu
dbh
„ Number of reset times (H04)
H04 specifies the number of reset times for the inverter to automatically attempt to escape
from the tripped state. When H04 = 0, the auto-reset function will not be activated.
If the "auto-reset" function has been specified, the inverter may automatically restart and run the
motor stopped due to a trip fault, depending on the cause of the tripping.
Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even
when the auto-resetting succeeds.
Otherwise an accident could occur.
„ Reset interval (H05)
After the reset interval specified by H05 from when the inverter enters the tripped state, it
issues a reset command to auto-reset the tripped state. Refer to the timing scheme diagram
below.
<Timing scheme for failed retry (No. of reset times: 3)>
The auto-reset operation can be monitored from the external equipment by assigning the
digital output signal TRY to any of the programmable output terminals [Y1] and [30A/B/C] with
E20 or E27 (data = 26).
5-70
H06
Cooling Fan ON/OFF Control
To prolong the life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running, the cooling fan stops
when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops.
However, since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its life, the cooling fan is kept
running for 10 minutes once it is started.
H06 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to control its ON/OFF.
Data for H06
H07
Cooling fan ON/OFF
0
Disable (Cooling fan always ON)
1
Enable (ON/OFF control effective)
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern
H07 specifies the acceleration and deceleration patterns (patterns to control output
frequency).
Linear acceleration/deceleration
The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration.
S-curve acceleration/deceleration
To reduce an impact that acceleration/deceleration would make on the machine (load), the
inverter gradually accelerates or decelerates the motor in both starting and ending zones of
acceleration/deceleration. Two types of S-curve acceleration/deceleration rates are available;
5% (weak) and 10% (strong) of the maximum frequency, which are shared by the four
inflection points.
The acceleration/deceleration time command determines the duration of acceleration/
deceleration in the linear period; hence, the actual acceleration/deceleration time is longer
than the reference acceleration/deceleration time.
5-71
Acceleration/deceleration time
<S-curve acceleration/deceleration (weak): when the frequency change is 10% or more of the
maximum frequency>
Acceleration or deceleration time (s) = (2 x 5/100 + 90/100+ 2 x 5/100) x (reference
acceleration or deceleration time)
= 1.1 x (reference acceleration or deceleration time)
<S-curve acceleration/deceleration (strong): when the frequency change is 20% or more of
the maximum frequency>
Acceleration or deceleration time (s) = (2 x 10/100 + 80/100 + 2 x 10/100) x (reference
acceleration or deceleration time)
= 1.2 x (reference acceleration or deceleration time)
Curvilinear acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration/deceleration is linear below the base frequency (constant torque) but it slows
down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor (constant output).
This acceleration/deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the
maximum performance of the motor.
Choose an appropriate acceleration/deceleration time, taking into account the
machinery’s load torque.
H11
Deceleration Mode
H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF.
Data for H11
Function
0
Normal deceleration
The inverter decelerates and stops the motor according to deceleration
commands specified by H07 (Acceleration/deceleration pattern), F08
(Deceleration time 1), and E11 (Deceleration time 2).
1
Coast-to-stop
The inverter immediately shuts down its output, so the motor stops
according to the inertia of the motor and machine and their kinetic
energy losses.
When reducing the reference frequency, the inverter decelerates the motor
according to the deceleration commands even if H11 = 1 (Coast-to-stop).
5-72
H12
Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting (Mode selection)
H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the
overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level.
Under the current limit processing, the inverter immediately turns OFF its output gate to
suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency.
Data for H12
Function
0
Disable
An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting
level.
1
Enable
The current limiting operation is effective.
If any problem occurs when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting
processing, it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip (H12 = 0) and actuate a mechanical
brake at the same time.
The similar function is the current limiter specified by F43 and F44. The current
limiter (F43, F44) implements the current control by software, so an operation delay
occurs. When you have enabled the current limiter (F43, F44), also enable the
instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12 to obtain a quick response current
limiting.
u
0
Depending on the load, extremely short acceleration time may activate the current
limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency, causing hunting
(undesirable oscillation of the system) or activating the inverter overvoltage trip
(alarm
). When specifying the acceleration time, therefore, you need to take into
account machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load.
When the instantaneous overcurrent limiting is enabled, the motor output torque could
drop. For driving elevating machinery which could cause a serious problem with a drop of
the motor output torque, therefore, disable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting. Note
that disabling it will cause an overcurrent trip when a current exceeding the inverter
protection level flows, so secure the protective coordination using a mechanical brake.
An accident could occur.
5-73
H45
H97
Mock Alarm
Clear Alarm Data
H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external
sequences function correctly at the time of machine setup.
Setting the H45 data to "1" displays mock alarm err on the LED monitor. It also issues alarm
output ALM (if assigned to a digital output terminal specified by E20 or E27). (Accessing the
H45 data requires simultaneous keying of "
key +
key.") After that, the H45 data
automatically reverts to "0," allowing you to reset the alarm.
Just as for data (alarm history and relevant information) of those alarms that could occur in
running the inverter, the inverter saves mock alarm data, enabling you to confirm the mock
alarm status.
To clear the mock alarm data, use H97. (Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous
keying of "
key +
key.") H97 data automatically reverts to "0" after clearing the alarm
data.
H69
H76
Automatic Deceleration (Anti-regenerative control) (Mode selection)
Automatic Deceleration (Frequency increment limit for braking)
H69 specifies the anti-regenerative control.
In inverters not equipped with a PWM converter or braking resistor, if regenerative energy
returned exceeds the inverter's braking capability, an overvoltage trip occurs.
When H69 = 1: The anti-regenerative control is functionally equivalent to that of the original
FRENIC-Mini series (FRN………C1…-……). That is, when the DC link bus voltage exceeds
the preset voltage limiting level, the inverter lengthens the deceleration time to three times
the specified time to decrease the deceleration torque to 1/3. In this way, the inverter
reduces the regenerative energy tentatively. This control applies only in deceleration. When
the load on the motor results in a braking effect, the control does not have any effect.
When H69 = 2 or 4: The inverter controls the output frequency to keep the braking torque at
around 0 N·m in both acceleration/deceleration and constant speed running phases in order
to avoid an overvoltage trip.
Since increasing the output frequency too much under anti-regenerative control is
dangerous, the inverter has a torque limiter (Frequency increment limit for braking) that can
be specified by H76. The torque limiter limits the inverter's output frequency to less than
"Reference frequency + H76 setting."
Note that the torque limiter activated restrains the anti-regenerative control, resulting in a
trip with an overvoltage alarm in some cases. Increasing the H76 data (0.0 to 400.0 Hz)
makes the anti-regenerative control capability high.
In addition, during deceleration triggered by turning the run command OFF, the
anti-regenerative control increases the output frequency so that the inverter may not stop
the load depending on the load state (huge moment of inertia, for example). To avoid that,
H69 provides a choice of cancellation of the anti-regenerative control to apply when three
times the specified deceleration time is elapsed, thus decelerating the motor.
5-74
Data for H69
Function
0
Disable
1
Enable (Lengthen the deceleration time to three times the specified time
under voltage limiting control.) (Compatible with the original FRENIC-Mini
series FRN………C1…-……)
2
Enable (Torque limit control: Cancel the anti-regenerative control if the
actual deceleration time exceeds three times the specified one.)
4
Enable (Torque limit control: Disable force-to-stop processing.)
Enabling the anti-regenerative control may automatically increase the deceleration
time.
When a braking resistor is connected, disable the anti-regenerative control.
H70
Overload Prevention Control
H70 specifies the decelerating rate of the output frequency to prevent a trip from occurring
due to an overload. This control decreases the output frequency of the inverter before the
inverter trips due to a heat sink overheat or inverter overload (with an alarm indication of 0h1
or 0lu , respectively). It is useful for equipment such as pumps where a decrease in the
output frequency leads to a decrease in the load and it is necessary to keep the motor running
even when the output frequency drops.
Data for H70
0.00
0.01 to 100.00
999
Function
Decelerate the motor by deceleration time 1 (F08) or 2 (E11)
Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate from 0.01 to 100.00 (Hz/s)
Disable overload prevention control
In equipment where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease
in the load, the overload prevention control is of no use and should not be enabled.
H71
Deceleration Characteristics
Setting the H71 data to "1" (ON) enables forced brake control. If regenerative energy
produced during deceleration of the motor and returned to the inverter exceeds the inverter’s
braking capability, an overvoltage trip will occur. The forced brake control increases the motor
energy loss during deceleration, increasing the deceleration torque.
This function is aimed at controlling the torque during deceleration; it has no effect if
there is braking load.
Enabling the automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control, H69 = 2 or 4)
disables the deceleration characteristics specified by H71.
When replacing the original FRENIC-Mini series (FRN………C1…-……) with the
upgraded one (FRN………C2…-……), note the following.
The original FRENIC-Mini series (FRN………C1…-……) does not support H71, but
H71 may be set to "1." On the upgraded one, however, it is not necessary to set H71
to "1."
5-75
H94
Cumulative Run Time of Motor 1
Operating the keypad can display the cumulative run time of motor 1. This feature is useful for
management and maintenance of the machinery. Using H94 can modify the cumulative run
time of the motor to the desired value to be used as an arbitrary initial data. Specifying "0"
clears the cumulative run time.
H98
Protection/Maintenance Function (Mode selection)
H98 specifies whether to enable or disable (a) automatic lowering of carrier frequency, (b)
input phase loss protection, (c) output phase loss protection, and (d) judgment on the life of
the DC link bus capacitor, as well as specifying the judgment threshold on the life of the DC
link bus capacitor, in a combination of Bit 0 to Bit 4.
Automatic lowering of carrier frequency (Bit 0)
This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter
running.
Even if a heat sink overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load, abnormal ambient
temperature, or cooling system failure, enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to
avoid tripping (0h1, or 0luv). Note that enabling this function results in increased motor
noise.
Input phase loss protection (lin ) (Bit 1)
Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit
due to phase loss or line-to-line voltage unbalance in the three-phase power supplied to the
inverter, this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm lin .
In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected,
phase loss or line-to-line voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the
relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit.
Output phase loss protection (0pl ) (Bit 2)
Upon detection of phase loss in the output while the inverter is running, this feature stops the
inverter and displays an alarm 0pl. Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter
output circuit, if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation, all the phases will be lost.
In such a case, this protection feature does not work.
Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor (Bit 3)
Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor between
factory default setting and your own choice.
Before specifying the threshold of your own choice, measure and confirm the
reference level in advance. For details, refer to Chapter 7.
5-76
Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor (Bit 4)
Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length
of time for discharging after power OFF. The discharging time is determined by the
capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter. Therefore, if the load
inside the inverter fluctuates significantly, the discharging time cannot be accurately
measured, and as a result, it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached. To
avoid such an error, you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor.
Since load may vary significantly in the following cases, disable the judgment on the life
during operation. Either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under
appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the
operating conditions matching the actual ones.
• A remote keypad (option) is used.
• Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to the terminals of
the DC link bus.
For details, refer to Chapter 7.
To set data of H98, assign functions to each bit (total 5 bits) and set it in decimal format. The
table below lists functions assigned to each bit.
Bit number
Function
Data = 0
Data = 1
Example of
decimal
expression (19)
Bit 4
Bit 3
Select life
Judge the life
judgment
of DC link bus
threshold of DC
capacitor
link bus capacitor
Disable
Use the factory
default
Enable
Use the user
setting
Enable (1)
Use the factory
default (0)
Bit 2
Bit 1
Detect
output
phase loss
Detect
input
phase loss
Disable
Disable
Bit 0
Lower the
carrier
frequency
automatically
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable (0)
Enable (1)
Enable (1)
Conversion table (Decimal to/from binary)
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Bit 4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Binary
Bit 2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
5-77
Decimal
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Bit 4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Binary
Bit 2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Bit 1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
5.3 Notes in Driving PMSM
When driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM), observe the following notes. Items
not covered in this section are the same as for induction motor (IM) drive.
The PMSM drive is available in the ROM version 0500 or later. (The ROM version can be checked
with item 5_14 on Menu #5 "Maintenance information" in Programming mode.)
Item
Drive by
commercial power
Wiring
Specifications
A PMSM cannot be driven by commercial power. Be sure to use an inverter.
A failure could occur.
Be sure to match inverter's output terminals (U, V and W) with motor's input
terminals (U, V and W).
When F42 = 11 (V/f control for PMSM drive)
Control mode
At the start of driving the motor, the inverter flows current equivalent to 80% of
the motor rated current (P03) to pull in the magnetic pole position for
synchronization. After that, the inverter accelerates the motor to the reference
frequency.
No magnetic pole position detection function is provided.
No auto search for an idling PMSM and restart function are provided.
Depending upon the magnetic pole position, the motor may run in the reverse
direction slightly at the start of running.
Speed control
range
The speed control range is from 10% to 100% of the base frequency (F04).
Set the reference frequency to 10% or more of the F04 data.
The following motor parameters are used, so consult the motor manufacturer
and configure the correct values. No tuning function is provided.
F03: Maximum Frequency 1 (Hz)
F04: Base frequency (Hz)
F05: Rated voltage at base frequency) (V)
(When F05 = 0, the inverter acts as 200/400V setting.)
F06: Maximum Output Voltage 1 (V)
P03: Motor rated current (A)
Motor constants
P60: Armature resistance (Ω)
P61: d-axis inductance (mH)
P62: q-axis inductance (mH)
P63: Induced voltage (V)
P90: Overcurrent protection level (A)
If any of P60, P62 and P63 is set to "0.00," the inverter does not start. Be sure to
set correct values. The factory defaults of P60 to P63 are "0.00."
If motor parameters are not correct, the inverter cannot run normally.
Set P90 to the value less than the demagnetizing current.
A failure could occur.
Carrier frequency
The carrier frequency (F26) should be 2 to 16 kHz. Running a PMSM at 0.75 or
1 kHz may result in a failure due to demagnetization. The automatic carrier
frequency lowering function at the time of inverter overheat does not work.
A failure could occur.
2nd motor
A PMSM cannot be driven as the 2nd motor.
5-78
Item
V/f pattern
Specifications
Linear V/f pattern only.
The load selection value (F37) will be ignored.
Auto energy saving
When driving a PMSM, the high-efficiency control is always ON.
Auto-tuning
A PMSM cannot be tuned.
Instantaneous
overcurrent limiter
Restart mode after
momentary power
failure
Automatic
deceleration
(anti-regenerative
control),
Brake signal
Not available for a PMSM.
The H12 setting will be ignored. Even if H12 = 1, an overcurrent trip occurs due
to an overcurrent incident.
When the F14 data is set to either 4 or 5, the inverter restarts with pull-in by
current.
When H69 = 1, the automatic deceleration is performed only on inverters
compatible with the original FRENIC-Mini series (FRN………C1…-……).
When H69 = 2 or 4, no automatic deceleration is performed.
Not available for a PMSM.
It is always OFF.
Jogging operation
Not available for a PMSM.
DC braking
Not available for a PMSM.
Others
Be sure to consult the motor manufacturers before actual operation.
A failure could occur.
5-79
Chapter 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting
If any of the protective functions has been activated, first remove the cause. Then, after checking
that the all run commands are set to OFF, reset the alarm. If the alarm is released while any run
command is set to ON, the inverter may supply the power to the motor, running the motor.
Injury may occur.
- Even though the inverter has interrupted power to the motor, if the voltage is applied to the
main circuit power input terminals L1/R, L2/S and L3/T (L1/L and L2/N for single-phase
voltage input), voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U, V, and W.
- Turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes. Make sure that the LED monitor is turned
OFF. Further, make sure, using a multimeter or a similar instrument, that the DC link bus
voltage between the terminals P (+) and N (-) has dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC or
below).
Electric shock may occur.
Follow the procedure below to solve problems.
(1) First, check that the inverter is correctly wired, referring to Chapter 2 Section 2.3.5 "Wiring for
main circuit terminals and grounding terminals."
(2) Check whether an alarm code is displayed on the LED monitor.
If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
6-1
6.2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor
6.2.1
[1]
Abnormal motor operation
The motor does not rotate.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) No power supplied to
the inverter.
Check the input voltage, output voltage and interphase voltage
unbalance.
Î Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), a
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage
circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) or a
magnetic contactor (MC).
Î Check for voltage drop, phase loss, poor connections, or poor
contacts, and fix them if necessary.
(2) No run forward/reverse
command was inputted,
or both the commands
were inputted
simultaneously (external
signal operation).
Check the input status of the forward/reverse command with Menu
#4 "I/O Checking" using the keypad.
(3) No indication of rotation
direction (keypad
operation).
Check the input status of the forward/reverse rotation direction
command with Menu #4 "I/O Checking" using the keypad.
(4) The inverter could not
accept any run
commands from the
keypad since it was in
Programming mode.
Check which operation mode the inverter is in, using the keypad.
(5) A run command with
higher priority than the
one attempted was
active, and the run
command was stopped.
Refer to the block diagram of the drive command generator* and
check the higher priority run command with Menu #2 "Data
Checking" and Menu #4 "I/O Checking" using the keypad.
(6) The reference frequency
was below the starting or
stop frequency.
Check that a frequency command has been entered correctly, using
Menu #4 "I/O Checking" on the keypad.
Î Input a run command.
Î Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both
commands are being inputted.
Î Correct the assignment of commands FWD and REV to function
codes E98 and E99.
Î Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals
[FWD] and [REV] correctly.
Î Make sure that the sink/source jumper switch on the printed
circuit board (PCB) is properly configured.
Î Input the rotation direction (F02 = 0), or select the keypad
operation with which the rotation direction is fixed (F02 = 2 or 3).
Î Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run
command.
*Refer to the FRENIC-Mini User's Manual, Chapter 4.
Î Correct any incorrect function code data settings (H30) or cancel
the higher priority run command.
Î Set the frequency command to the same or higher than that of
the starting and stop frequencies (F23 and F25).
Î Reconsider the starting and stop frequencies (F23 and F25), and
if necessary, change them to lower values.
Î Inspect the external frequency command potentiometers, signal
converters, switches, or relay contacts. Replace any ones that
are faulty.
Î Connect the external circuit wires correctly to terminals [13], [12],
[11], and [C1].
6-2
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(7) A frequency command
with higher priority than
the one attempted was
active.
Check the higher priority run command with Menu #2 "Data
Checking" and Menu #4 "I/O Checking" using the keypad, referring
to the block diagram of the drive command generator*.
*Refer to the FRENIC-Mini User's Manual, Chapter 4.
Î Correct any incorrect function code data (e.g. cancel the higher
priority run command).
(8) The upper and lower
frequencies for the
frequency limiters were
set incorrectly.
Check the data of function codes F15 (Frequency limiter (High)) and
F16 (Frequency limiter (Low)).
(9) The coast-to-stop
command was effective.
Check the data of function codes E01 through E03, E98 and E99
and the input signal status, using Menu #4 "I/O Checking" on the
keypad.
Î Change the settings of F15 and F16 to the correct ones.
Î Release the coast-to-stop command setting.
(10) Broken wire, incorrect
connection or poor
contact with the motor.
Check the wiring (Measure the output current).
(11) Overload
Measure the output current.
Î Repair the wires to the motor, or replace them.
Î Reduce the load (In winter, the load tends to increase.)
Check that any mechanical brake is activated.
Î Release the mechanical brake, if any.
(12) Torque generated by
the motor was
insufficient.
Check that the motor starts running if the value of torque boost
(F09, A05) is increased.
Î Increase the value of torque boost (F09, A05) and try to run the
motor.
Check the data of function codes F04, F05, H50 through H53, A02,
and A03.
Î Change the V/f pattern to match the motor's characteristics.
Check that the motor switching signal (selecting motor 2 or 1) is
correct and the data of function codes matches each motor.
Î Correct the motor switching signal.
Î Modify the function code data to match the connected motor.
Check whether the reference frequency signal is below the
slip-compensated frequency of the motor.
Î Change the reference frequency signal so that it becomes higher
than the slip-compensated frequency of the motor.
(13) Wrong connection or
poor contact of DC
reactor (DCR).
Check the wiring.
Î Connect the DCR correctly. Repair or replace DCR wires.
6-3
[2]
The motor rotates, but the speed does not increase.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) The maximum frequency
currently specified was
too low.
Check the data of function code F03 or A01 (Maximum frequency).
(2) The data of frequency
limiter currently specified
was too low.
Check the data of function code F15 (Frequency limiter (High)).
(3) The reference frequency
currently specified was
too low.
Check the signals for the frequency command entered via the
analog input terminals, using Menu #4 "I/O Checking" on the
keypad.
Î Correct the F03 or A01 data.
Î Correct the F15 data.
Î Increase the reference frequency.
Î Inspect the external frequency command potentiometers, signal
converters, switches, or relay contacts. Replace any ones that
are faulty.
Î Connect the external circuit wires to terminals [13], [12], [11], and
[C1] correctly.
(4) A frequency command
(e.g., multistep
frequency or via
communications link)
with higher priority than
the one expected was
active and its reference
frequency was too low.
Check the data of the relevant function codes and what frequency
commands are being received, through Menu #1 "Data Setting,"
Menu #2 "Data Checking" and Menu #4 "I/O Checking," on the
keypad, referring to the block diagram of the drive frequency
generator*.
*Refer to the FRENIC-Mini User's Manual, Chapter 4.
(5) The acceleration time
was too long or too short.
Check the data of function codes F07 and E10 (Acceleration time).
(6) Overload
Measure the output current.
Î Correct any incorrect data of function code (e.g. cancel higher
priority run commands, etc.).
Î Change the acceleration time to match the load.
Î Reduce the load (Adjust the dumper of the fan or the valve of the
pump). (In winter, the load tends to increase.)
Check whether any mechanical brake is activated.
Î Release the mechanical brake.
(7) Mismatch with the
characteristics of the
motor.
If auto-torque boost or auto-energy saving operation is under way,
check whether the data of P02, P03, P06, P07, and P08 (A16, A17,
A20, A21, and A22) agrees with the parameters of the motor.
Î Perform auto-tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used.
(8) The current limiting
operation did not
increase the output
frequency.
Make sure that F43 (Current limiter (Mode selection)) is set to "2"
and check the setting of F44 (Current limiter (Level)).
Î Correct the data of F44. Or, if the current limiter operation is not
needed, set F43 to "0" (disable).
Decrease the value of torque boost (F09), then run the motor again
and check if the speed increases.
Î Adjust the value of the torque boost (F09).
Check the data of function codes F04, F05, H50 through H53 to
ensure that the V/f pattern setting is right.
Î Match the V/f pattern values with the motor ratings.
6-4
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(9) Bias and gain incorrectly
set.
Check the data of function codes F18, C50, C32, C34, C37, and
C39.
Î Readjust the bias and gain to appropriate values.
[3]
The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) Wiring to the motor is
incorrect.
Check the wiring to the motor.
(2) Incorrect connection
and settings for run
commands and rotation
direction command
FWD and REV.
Check the data of function codes E98 and E99 and the connection
to terminals [FWD] and [REV].
(3) A run command (with
fixed rotation direction)
from the keypad is active,
but the rotation direction
setting is incorrect.
Check the data of function code F02 (Run command).
[4]
Î Connect terminals U, V, and W of the inverter to the U, V, and W
terminals of the motor, respectively.
Î Correct the data of the function codes and the connection.
Î Change the data of function code F02 to "2:
/
keys on
keypad (forward)" or "3:
/
keys on keypad (reverse)."
Speed fluctuation or current oscillation (e.g., hunting) occurs during running at
constant speed.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) The frequency
command fluctuates.
Check the signals for the frequency command with Menu #4 "I/O
Checking" using the keypad.
Î Increase the filter constants (C33, C38) for the frequency
command.
(2) An external frequency
command potentiometer
is used.
Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external
sources.
Î Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far
as possible.
Î Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals.
Check whether the frequency command has not failed because of
noise from the inverter.
Î Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the potentiometer
or set a ferrite core on the signal wire. (See Figure 2.6.)
(3) Frequency switching or
multistep frequency
command was enabled.
Check whether the relay signal for switching the frequency
command is chattering.
Î If the relay contact is defective, replace the relay.
6-5
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(4) The wiring length
between the inverter and
the motor is too long.
Check whether auto-torque boost or auto-energy saving operation
is enabled.
(5) The machinery is hunting
due to vibration caused
by low rigidity of the load.
Or the current is
irregularly oscillating due
to special motor
parameters.
Once cancel all the automatic control systems--auto torque boost,
auto energy saving operation, overload prevention control, current
limiter, automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control), and slip
compensation, and then check that the motor vibration comes to a
stop.
Î Perform auto-tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used.
Î Select constant torque load (F37, A13 = 1) and check for any
vibration.
Î Make the output wires as short as possible.
Î Cancel the functions causing the vibration.
Î Readjust the output current fluctuation damping gain (H80,
A41).
Check that the motor vibration is suppressed if you decrease the
level of F26 (Motor sound (Carrier frequency)) or set F27 (Motor
sound (Tone)) to "0."
Î Decrease the carrier frequency (F26) or set the tone to "0" (F27
= 0).
[5]
Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) The specified carrier
frequency is too low.
Check the data of function codes F26 (Motor sound (Carrier
frequency)) and F27 (Motor sound (Tone)).
Î Increase the carrier frequency (F26).
Î Change the setting of F27 to appropriate value.
(2) The ambient
temperature of the
inverter was too high
(when automatic
lowering of the carrier
frequency was enabled
by H98).
Measure the temperature inside the panel where the inverter is
mounted.
(3) Resonance with the load
Check the machinery mounting accuracy or check whether there is
resonance with the mounting base.
Î If it is over 40°C, lower it by improving the ventilation.
Î Lower the temperature of the inverter by reducing the load. (For
fans or pumps, decrease the frequency limiter value (F15).)
Note: If you disable H98, an 0h1 or 0lu alarm may occur.
Î Disconnect the motor from the machinery and run it alone, then
find where the resonance comes from. Upon locating the cause,
improve the characteristics of the source of the resonance.
Î Adjust the settings of C01 (Jump frequency 1) to C04 (Jump
frequency (Hysteresis width)) so as to avoid continuous running
in the frequency range causing resonance.
6-6
[6]
The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) The inverter ran the
motor with S-curve or
curvilinear pattern.
Check the data of function code H07 (Acceleration/deceleration
pattern).
(2) The current limiting
operation prevented the
output frequency from
increasing (during
acceleration).
Make sure that F43 (Current limiter (Mode selection)) is set to "2:
Enable during acceleration and at constant speed," then check that
the setting of F44 (Current limiter (Level)) is reasonable.
(3) The automatic
deceleration
(Anti-regenerative
control) is enabled during
deceleration.
Check the data of function code H69 (Automatic deceleration
(Mode selection)).
(4) Overload.
Measure the output current.
Î Select the linear pattern (H07 = 0).
Î Shorten the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10 and
E11).
Î Readjust the setting of F44 to an appropriate value, or disable
the function of current limiter with F43.
Î Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10 and
E11).
Î Increase the deceleration time (F08 and E11).
Î Reduce the load (For fans or pumps, decrease the frequency
limiter value (F15).) (In winter, the load tends to increase.).
(5) Torque generated by the
motor was insufficient.
Check that the motor starts running if the value of the torque boost
(F09, A05) is increased.
Î Increase the value of the torque boost (F09, A05).
(6) An external
potentiometer is used for
frequency setting.
Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external
sources.
(7) The specified
acceleration/deceleration
time is incorrect.
Check the terminal command RT1 ("Select ACC/DEC time").
Î Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far
as possible.
Î Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals.
Î Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the external
frequency potentiometer or set a ferrite core on the signal wire.
(See Figure 2.6.)
Î Correct the RT1 setting.
6-7
[7]
The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power
failure.
Possible Causes
(1) The data of function
code F14 is either "0" or
"1."
(2) The run command
remains OFF even after
the power has been
restored.
What to Check and Suggested Measures
Check if an undervoltage trip (lu ) occurs.
Î Change the data of function code F14 (Restart mode after
momentary power failure (Mode selection)) to "4" or "5."
Check the input signal with Menu #4 "I/O Checking" using the
keypad.
Î Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit. If
necessary, consider the use of a relay that can keep the run
command ON.
In 3-wire operation, the power to the inverter's control PCB has
been shut down once because of a long momentary power failure,
or, the HLD terminal command ("Enable 3-wire operation") has
been turned OFF once.
Î Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be
issued again within 2 seconds after power has been restored.
[8]
The motor does not run as expected.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) Incorrect configuration
of function codes
Check that function codes are correctly configured and no
unnecessary configuration has been made.
Î Configure all function codes correctly.
Make a note of function code data currently configured and then
initialize all function code data (H03).
Î After initialization, reconfigure the necessary function codes one
by one, checking the running status of the motor.
6.2.2
[1]
Problems with inverter settings
Nothing appears on the LED monitor.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) No power supplied to
the inverter.
Check the input voltage, output voltage and interphase voltage
unbalance.
Î Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), a residualcurrent-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) or a magnetic
contactor (MC).
Î Check for voltage drop, phase loss, poor connections, or poor
contacts, and fix them if necessary.
(2) The power for the control
PCB did not reach a
sufficiently high level.
Check if the jumper bar has been removed between terminals P1
and P(+) or if there is poor contact between the jumper bar and the
terminals.
Î Mount a jumper bar or DC reactor between terminals P1 and
P(+). For poor contact, tighten up the screws.
6-8
[2]
The desired menu is not displayed.
Possible Causes
Check and Measures
(1) The menu display mode
is not selected
appropriately.
Check the data of function code E52 (Keypad (Menu display
mode)).
[3]
Î Change the E52 data so that the desired menu appears.
Data of function codes cannot be changed.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) An attempt was made to
change function code
data that cannot be
changed when the
inverter is running.
Check if the inverter is running with Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring"
using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function
codes can be changed when the motor is running, referring to the
function code tables.
(2) The data of the function
codes is protected.
Check the data of function code F00 (Data protection).
(3) The WE-KP terminal
command ("Enable data
change with keypad") is
not entered though it
has been assigned to a
digital input terminal.
Check the data of function codes E01 through E03, E98 and E99
and the input signals with Menu #4 "I/O Checking" using the
keypad.
(4) The
key was not
pressed.
Check whether you have pressed the
function code data.
Î Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes.
Î Change the F00 data from "Enable data protection" ("1" or "3") to
"Disable data protection" ("0" or "2").
Î Input a WE-KP command through a digital input terminal.
Î Press the
key after changing the
key after changing the function code data.
(5) The data of function
codes F02, E01 through
E03, E98, and E99
cannot be changed.
Either one of the FWD and REV terminal commands is ON.
(6) The DC link bus voltage
has dropped below the
undervoltage detection
level.
Using Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" on the keypad, check
the DC link bus voltage and measure the input voltage.
Î Turn OFF both FWD and REV.
Î Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input
specifications.
6-9
6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor
„ Quick reference table of alarm codes
Alarm
code
Name
Refer to
0c1
Alarm
code
Name
Refer to
dbh
Braking resistor overheated
6-16
0l1
0l2
Motor 1 overload
Motor 2 overload
6-17
0c3
0lu
Inverter overload
6-17
0u1
er1
Memory error
6-18
0c2
0u2
Instantaneous overcurrent
Overvoltage
6-10
6-11
0u3
lu
er2
Keypad communications error
6-19
er3
CPU error
6-19
Undervoltage
6-12
er6
Operation protection
6-19
lin
Input phase loss
6-13
er7
Tuning error
6-20
0pl
Output phase loss
6-14
er8
RS-485 communications error
6-21
0h1
Heat sink overheat
6-14
erf
Data saving error during
undervoltage
6-22
0h2
External alarm
6-15
err
Mock alarm
6-22
cof
PID feedback wire break
6-23
0h4
Motor protection
(PTC thermistor)
erd
Step-out detection (for drive of
permanent magnet synchronous
motors)
6-23
[1]
6-15
0cn Instantaneous overcurrent
Problem
The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level.
0c1
Overcurrent occurred during acceleration.
0c2
Overcurrent occurred during deceleration.
0c3
Overcurrent occurred during running at a constant speed.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) The inverter output lines
were short-circuited.
Disconnect the wiring from the inverter output terminals ([U], [V],
and [W]) and measure the interphase resistance of the motor wiring.
Check if the resistance is too low.
Î Remove the short-circuited parts (including replacement of the
wires, relay terminals and motor).
(2) Ground faults have
occurred at the inverter
output lines.
Disconnect the wiring from the inverter output terminals ([U], [V],
and [W]) and perform a Megger test.
Î Remove the grounded parts (including replacement of the wires,
relay terminals and motor).
6-10
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(3) Loads were too heavy.
Measure the motor current with a measuring device to trace the
current trend. Then, use this data to judge if the trend is over the
calculated load value for your system design.
ÎIf the load is too heavy, reduce it or raise the inverter capacity.
Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes
in the current.
Î If there are any sudden changes, make the load fluctuation
smaller or raise the inverter capacity.
Î Enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting (H12 = 1).
(4) Excessive torque boost
specified.
(when F37, A13 = 0, 1, 3
or 4)
Check whether decreasing the torque boost (F09, A05) reduces the
output current but does not stall the motor.
(5) Acceleration/
deceleration time
currently specified is too
short.
Recalculate the acceleration/deceleration torque and time needed
for the current load, based on the moment of inertia of the load and
the acceleration/deceleration time.
(6) Malfunction caused by
noise.
Check if noise control measures are appropriate (e.g., correct
grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires).
Î If no stall occurs, decrease the torque boost (F09, A05).
Î Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10,
E11).
Î Enable current limiter (F43)
Î Raise the inverter capacity.
Î Implement noise control measures. For details, refer to the
FRENIC-Mini User's Manual, "Appendix A."
Î Enable the Auto-reset (H04).
Î Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor's coils or other
solenoids (if any) causing noise.
[2]
0un Overvoltage
Problem
The DC link bus voltage was over the detection level of overvoltage.
0u1
Overvoltage occurs during the acceleration.
0u2
Overvoltage occurs during the deceleration.
0u3
Overvoltage occurs during running at constant speed.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) The power supply
voltage exceeded the
inverter's specification
range.
Measure the input voltage.
(2) A surge current entered
the input power supply.
In the same power line, if a phase-advancing capacitor is turned
ON/OFF or a thyristor converter is activated, a surge (momentary
large increase in the voltage or current) may be caused in the input
power.
Î Decrease the voltage to within the specified range.
Î Install a DC reactor.
6-11
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(3) The specified
deceleration time was
too short for the moment
of inertia of the load.
Recalculate the deceleration torque based on the moment of inertia
of the load and the deceleration time.
(4) The specified
acceleration time was
too short.
Check if the overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration.
(5) Braking load was too
heavy.
Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter.
(6) Malfunction caused by
noise.
Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level
when the overvoltage alarm occurred.
Î Increase the deceleration time (F08, E11).
Î Enable the automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control)
(H69 = 2 or 4), or deceleration characteristics (H71 = 1).
Î Set the rated voltage (at base frequency) (F05, A03) to "0" to
improve the braking capability.
Î Increase the acceleration time (F07, E10).
Î Select the S-curve pattern (H07).
Î Set the rated voltage (at base frequency) (F05, A03) to "0" to
improve the braking capability.
Î Implement noise control measures. For details, refer to the
FRENIC-Mini User's Manual, "Appendix A."
Î Enable the auto-reset (H04).
Î Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor's coils or other
solenoids (if any) causing noise.
[3]
lu Undervoltage
Problem
DC link bus voltage has dropped below the undervoltage detection level.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) A momentary power
failure occurred.
Î Reset the alarm.
Î To restart the motor without treating this condition as an alarm,
set F14 to "4" or "5," depending on the load type.
(2) The power to the
inverter was switched
back to ON too soon
(when F14 = 1).
Check if the power to the inverter was switched back to ON while
the control power was still alive. (Check whether the LEDs on the
keypad light.)
(3) The power supply
voltage did not reach the
inverter's specification
range.
Measure the input voltage.
(4) Peripheral equipment
for the power circuit
malfunctioned, or the
connection was
incorrect.
Measure the input voltage to find which peripheral equipment
malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect.
Î Switch the power ON again after all LEDs on the keypad go off.
Î Increase the voltage to within the specified range.
Î Replace any faulty peripheral equipment, or correct any incorrect
connections.
6-12
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(5) Any other load(s)
connected to the same
power supply has
required a large starting
current, causing a
temporary voltage drop.
Measure the input voltage and check the voltage fluctuation.
(6) Inverter's inrush current
caused the power voltage
drop because the power
supply transformer
capacity was insufficient.
Check if the alarm occurs when a molded case circuit breaker
(MCCB), residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth
leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) or
magnetic contactor (MC) is turned ON.
[4]
Î Reconsider the power system configuration.
ÎReconsider the capacity of the power supply transformer.
lin Input phase loss
Problem
Input phase loss occurred, or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) Main circuit power input
wires broken.
Measure the input voltage.
(2) Screws on the main
circuit power input
terminals are loose.
Check if the screws on the inverter input terminals have become
loose.
(3) Interphase voltage
unbalance between
three phases was too
large.
Measure the input voltage.
(4) Overload cyclically
occurred.
Measure the ripple wave of the DC link bus voltage.
(5) Single-phase voltage
was input to the
three-phase input
inverter.
Check the inverter type.
Î Repair or replace the input wires.
Î Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque.
Î Connect an AC reactor (ACR) to lower the voltage unbalance
between input phases.
Î Raise the inverter capacity.
Î If the ripple is large, raise the inverter capacity.
Î Apply three-phase power. The FRENIC-Mini of three-phase input
cannot be driven by single-phase power supply.
The input phase loss protection can be disabled with the function code H98 (Protection/
Maintenance Function).
6-13
[5]
0pl Output phase loss
Problem
Output phase loss occurred.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) Inverter output wires are
broken.
Measure the output current.
(2) The motor winding is
broken.
Measure the output current.
(3) Screws on the main
circuit power input
terminals are loose.
Check if the screws on the inverter output terminals have become
loose.
(4) A single-phase motor
has been connected.
Î Single-phase motors cannot be used. Note that the FRENIC-Mini
only drives three-phase induction motors.
[6]
Î Replace the output wires.
Î Replace the motor.
Î Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque.
0h1 Heat sink overheat
Problem
Temperature around the heat sink has risen abnormally.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) Temperature around the
inverter exceeded the
inverter's specification
range.
Measure the temperature around the inverter.
(2) Ventilation path is
blocked.
Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter.
Î Lower the temperature around the inverter (e.g., ventilate the
panel where the inverter is mounted).
Î Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance.
Check if the heat sink is not clogged.
Î Clean the heat sink.
(3) Service life of cooling
fan has expired or
cooling fan is faulty.
Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan. Refer to Chapter
3, Section 3.4.5 "Reading maintenance information – "Maintenance
Information"."
Î Replace the cooling fan.
Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates normally.
Î Replace the cooling fan.
(4) Load was too heavy.
Measure the output current.
Î Reduce the load (e.g. Use the overload early warning (E34) to
reduce the load before the overload protection is activated.). (In
winter, the load tends to increase.)
Î Decease the motor sound (Carrier frequency) (F26).
Î Enable the overload prevention control (H70).
6-14
[7]
0h2 External alarm
Problem
External alarm was inputted (THR).
(when THR ("Enable external alarm trip") is assigned to any of digital input terminals
[X1] through [X3], [FWD], and [REV])
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) An alarm function of
external equipment was
activated.
Check the operation of external equipment.
(2) Wrong connection or
poor contact in external
alarm signal wiring.
Check if the external alarm signal wiring is correctly connected to
the terminal to which the THR terminal command ("Enable external
alarm trip") has been assigned (Any of E01 through E03, E98, and
E99 should be set to "9.").
Î Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred.
Î Connect the external alarm signal wire correctly.
(3) Incorrect setting of
function code data.
Check if the THR terminal command ("Enable external alarm trip")
has been assigned to an unavailable terminal (with E01 through
E03, E98, or E99).
Î Correct the assignment.
Check whether the normal/negative logic of the external signal
matches that of the THR terminal command specified by any of E01
through E03, E98 and E99.
Î Ensure the matching of the normal/negative logic.
[8]
0h4 Motor protection (PTC thermistor)
Problem
Temperature of the motor has risen abnormally.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) The temperature around
the motor exceeded the
motor's specification
range.
Measure the temperature around the motor.
(2) Cooling system for the
motor defective.
Check if the cooling system of the motor is operating normally.
(3) Load was too heavy.
Measure the output current.
Î Lower the temperature.
Î Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor.
Î Reduce the load (e.g. Use the overload early warning (E34) to
reduce the load before the overload protection is activated.). (In
winter, the load tends to increase.)
Î Lower the temperature around the motor.
Î Increase the motor sound (Carrier frequency) (F26).
(4) The activation level
(H27) of the PTC
thermistor for motor
overheat protection was
set inadequately.
Check the thermistor specifications and recalculate the detection
voltage.
(5) Connections and
resistance values of the
PTC thermistor and
pull-up resistor are not
appropriate.
Check the connections and the resistance value.
Î Modify the data of function code H27.
Î Correct the connections and replace the resistor with the one
having an appropriate resistance.
6-15
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(6) Excessive torque boost
specified. (F09, A05)
Check whether decreasing the torque boost (F09, A05) does not
stall the motor.
Î If no stall occurs, decrease the torque boost (F09, A05).
(7) The V/f pattern did not
match the motor.
Check if the base frequency (F04, A02) and the rated voltage at
base frequency (F05, A03) match the values on the motor's
nameplate.
Î Match the function code data to the values on the motor's
nameplate.
(8) Incorrect setting of
function code data.
Although no PTC thermistor is used, the thermistor mode is enabled
(H26).
Î Set the H26 data to "0" (Disable).
[9]
dbh Braking resistor overheated
Problem
The electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor has been activated.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) Braking load is too
heavy.
Reconsider the relationship between the braking load estimated
and the real load.
Î Lower the real braking load.
Î Review the performance of the current braking resistor and
increase the braking capability. (Modification of related function
code data (F50 and F51) is also required.)
(2) The specified
deceleration time was
too short.
Recalculate the deceleration torque and time needed for the current
load, based on the moment of inertia of the load and the
deceleration time.
Î Increase the deceleration time (F08, E11).
Î Review the performance of the current braking resistor and
increase the braking capability. (Modification of related function
code data (F50 and F51) is also required.)
(3) Incorrect setting of
function code data F50
and F51.
Recheck the specifications of the braking resistor.
Î Review the data of function codes F50 and F51, then reconfigure
them.
Note: The inverter issues an overheat alarm of the braking resistor by monitoring the magnitude of
the braking load, not by measuring its surface temperature.
When the braking resistor is frequently used so as to exceed the settings made by function codes
F50 and F51, therefore, the inverter issues an overheat alarm even if the surface temperature of the
braking resistor does not rise. To squeeze out full performance of the braking resistor, configure
function codes F50 and F51 while actually measuring the surface temperature of the braking
resistor.
6-16
[ 10 ] 0l1 Motor 1 overload
0l2 Motor 2 overload
Problem
Electronic thermal protection for motor 1 or motor 2 activated.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) The electronic thermal
characteristics do not
match the motor
overload characteristics.
Check the motor characteristics.
(2) Activation level for the
electronic thermal
protection was
inadequate.
Check the continuous allowable current of the motor.
(3) The specified
acceleration/
deceleration time was
too short.
Recalculate the acceleration/deceleration torque and time needed
for the current load, based on the moment of inertia of the load and
the acceleration/deceleration time.
(4) Load was too heavy.
Measure the output current.
Î Reconsider the data of function codes (P99, F10 and F12) or
(A39, A06 and A08).
Î Use an external thermal relay.
Î Reconsider and change the data of function code F11 or A07.
Î Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10,
E11).
Î Reduce the load (e.g. Use the overload early warning (E34) to
reduce the load before the overload protection is activated.). (In
winter, the load tends to increase.)
[ 11 ] 0lu Inverter overload
Problem
Temperature inside inverter has risen abnormally.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) Temperature around the
inverter exceeded the
inverter's specification
range.
Measure the temperature around the inverter.
(2) Excessive torque boost
specified. (F09, A05)
Check whether decreasing the torque boost (F09, A05) does not
stall the motor.
Î Lower the temperature (e.g., ventilate the panel where the
inverter is mounted).
Î If no stall occurs, decrease the torque boost (F09, A05).
(3) The specified
acceleration/
deceleration time was
too short.
Recalculate the acceleration/deceleration torque and time needed
for the current load, based on the moment of inertia of the load and
the acceleration/deceleration time.
(4) Load was too heavy.
Measure the output current.
Î Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10,
E11).
Î Reduce the load (e.g. Use the overload early warning (E34) to
reduce the load before the overload protection is activated.). (In
winter, the load tends to increase.)
Î Decrease the motor sound (Carrier frequency) (F26).
Î Enable overload prevention control (H70).
6-17
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(5) Ventilation paths are
blocked.
Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter.
Î Ensure the clearance.
Check if the heat sink is not clogged.
Î Clean the heat sink.
(6) Service life of cooling
fan has expired or
cooling fan is faulty.
Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan. Refer to Chapter
3, Section 3.4.5 "Reading maintenance information – "Maintenance
Information"."
Î Replace the cooling fan.
Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates normally.
Î Replace the cooling fan.
(7) The wires to the motor
are too long, causing a
large leakage current
from them.
Measure the leakage current.
Î Insert an output circuit filter (OFL).
[ 12 ] er1 Memory error
Problem
Error occurred in writing data to the inverter memory.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) During writing of
function code data
(especially during
initialization or data
copying), the inverter
was shut down so that
the voltage to the control
PCB has dropped.
Initialize the function code data with H03 (= 1). After initialization,
check if pressing the
key resets the alarm.
Î Revert the initialized function code data to their previous
settings, then restart the operation.
(2) Inverter affected by
strong electrical noise
when writing data
(especially initializing
or copying data).
Check if appropriate noise control measures have been
implemented (e.g., correct grounding and routing of control and
main circuit wires). Also, perform the same check as described in
(1) above.
(3) Any error in control
circuit.
Initialize the function code data by setting H03 to "1," then reset the
alarm by pressing the
key and check that the alarm goes on.
Î Implement noise control measures. Revert the initialized function
code data to their previous settings, then restart the operation.
Î The control PCB (on which the CPU is mounted) is defective.
Contact your Fuji Electric representative.
6-18
[ 13 ] er2 Keypad communications error
Problem
A communications error occurred between the remote keypad (option) and the
inverter.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) Broken communications
cable or poor contact.
Check continuity of the cable, contacts and connections.
(2) Inverter affected by
strong electrical noise.
Check if appropriate noise control measures have been
implemented (e.g., correct grounding and routing of control and
main circuit wires).
Î Re-insert the connector firmly.
Î Replace the cable.
Î Implement noise control measures. For details, refer to the
FRENIC-Mini User's Manual, "Appendix A."
(3) The remote keypad
(option) defective.
Replace the keypad with another one and check whether a keypad
communications error (er2 ) no longer occurs.
Î Replace the keypad.
[ 14 ] er3 CPU error
Problem
A CPU error (e.g. erratic CPU operation) occurred.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) Inverter affected by
strong electrical noise.
Check if appropriate noise control measures have been
implemented (e.g. correct grounding and routing of control and
main circuit wires and communications cable).
Î Implement noise control measures.
[ 15 ] er6 Operation protection
Problem
An incorrect operation was attempted.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) The
key was
pressed when H96 = 1
or 3.
Check if the
key was pressed when a run command had been
entered from the input terminal or through the communications link.
Î If this was not intended, check the setting of H96.
(2) The start check function
was activated when H96
= 2 or 3.
Check if any of the following operations has been performed with a
run command being entered.
- Turning the power ON
- Resetting the alarm
- Switching the enable communications link LE operation
Î Review the running sequence to avoid input of a run command
when this error occurs.
If this was not intended, check the setting of H96.
(Turn the run command OFF before resetting the alarm.)
6-19
[ 16 ] er7 Tuning error
Problem
Auto-tuning failed.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) A phase was missing
(There was a phase
loss) in the connection
between the inverter
and the motor.
Î Properly connect the motor to the inverter.
(2) V/f or the rated current
of the motor was not
properly set.
Check whether the data of function codes matches the motor
specifications.
Motor 1: F04, F05, H50 through H53, P02, and P03
Motor 2: A02, A03, A16, and A17
(3) The wiring length
between the inverter
and the motor was too
long.
Check whether the wiring length between the inverter and the motor
exceeds 50 m.
(4) The rated capacity of the
motor was significantly
different from that of the
inverter.
Check whether the rated capacity of the motor is three or more
ranks lower, or two or more ranks higher than that of the inverter.
(5) The motor is a special
type such as a
high-speed motor.
Î Disable both auto-tuning and auto-torque boost (Set the data of
F37 or A13 to "1").
(6) A tuning operation
involving motor rotation
(P04 or A18 = 2) was
attempted while the
brake was applied to the
motor.
Î Specify the tuning that does not involve the motor rotation (P04
or A18 = 1).
Î Release the brake before tuning that involves the motor rotation
(P04 or A18 = 2).
Î Review, and if necessary, change the layout of the inverter and
the motor to shorten the connection wire. Alternatively, minimize
the wiring length without changing the layout.
Î Disable both auto-tuning and auto-torque boost (Set the data of
F37 or A13 to "1").
Î Replace the inverter with one with an appropriate capacity.
Î Manually specify the values for the motor parameters P06, P07
and P08 or A20, A21 and A22.
Î Disable both auto-tuning and auto-torque boost (Set the data of
F37 or A13 to "1").
For details of tuning errors, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.1.3 "Preparation before a test
run--Configuring function code data, „ Tuning errors."
6-20
[ 17 ] er8 RS-485 communications error
Problem
A communications error occurred during RS-485 communication.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) Communications
conditions of the inverter
do not match that of the
host equipment.
Compare the settings of the y codes (y01 to y10) with those of the
host equipment.
(2) Even though
no-response error
detection time (y08) has
been set,
communications is not
performed within the
specified cycle.
Check the host equipment.
(3) The host equipment
(e.g., PLCs and
computers) did not
operate due to incorrect
settings or
software/hardware
defective.
Check the host equipment.
(4) RS-485 converter did
not operate due to
incorrect connections or
settings, or defective
hardware.
Check the RS-485 converter (e.g., check for poor contact).
(5) Broken communications
cable or poor contact.
Check the continuity of the cable, contacts and connections.
(6) Inverter affected by
strong electrical noise.
Check if appropriate noise control measures have been
implemented (e.g., correct grounding and routing of control and
main circuit wires).
Î Correct any mismatch.
Î Change the settings of host equipment software or disable the
no-response error detection (y08 = 0).
Î Remove the cause of the equipment error.
Î Change the various RS-485 converter settings, reconnect the
wires, or replace hardware with recommended devices as
appropriate.
Î Replace the cable.
Î Implement noise control measures.
Î Implement noise reduction measures at the host side.
Î Replace the RS-485 converter with a recommended insulated
one.
6-21
[ 18 ] erf Data saving error during undervoltage
Problem
The inverter failed to save data such as the frequency commands, PID commands,
timer values for timer operation (which are specified through the keypad) or the output
frequencies modified by the UP/DOWN terminal commands when the power was
switched OFF.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) During data saving
performed when the
power was turned OFF,
the voltage fed to the
control PCB dropped in
an abnormally short
period due to the rapid
discharge of the DC link
bus.
Check how long it takes for the DC link bus voltage to drop to the
preset voltage when the power is turned OFF.
(2) Inverter affected by
strong electrical noise
during data saving
performed when the
power was turned OFF.
Check if appropriate noise control measures have been
implemented (e.g., correct grounding and routing of control and
main circuit wires).
(3) The control circuit failed.
Î Remove whatever is causing the rapid discharge of the DC link
key and resetting the alarm,
bus voltage. After pressing the
revert the data of the relevant function codes (such as the
frequency commands, PID commands, timer values for timer
operation (specified through the keypad) or the output
frequencies modified by the UP/DOWN terminal commands)
back to the original values and then restart the operation.
key
Î Implement noise control measures. After pressing the
and resetting the alarm, revert the data of the relevant function
codes (such as the frequency commands, PID commands, timer
values for timer operation (specified through the keypad) or the
output frequencies modified by the UP/DOWN terminal
commands) back to the original values and then restart the
operation.
Check if erf occurs each time power is switched ON.
Î The control PCB (on which the CPU is mounted) is defective.
Contact your Fuji Electric representative.
[ 19 ] err Mock alarm
Problem
The LED displays the alarm err.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) Data of the function
code H45 has been
set to "1."
This setting makes the inverter issue a mock alarm. Use this to
check out the sequence related to an alarm occurrence.
Î To escape from this alarm state, press the
6-22
key.
[ 20 ] cof PID feedback wire break
Problem
The PID feedback wire is broken.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) The PID feedback
signal wire is broken.
Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected
correctly.
Î Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected
correctly. Or, tighten up the related terminal screws.
Î Check whether any contact part bites the wire sheath.
(2) PID feedback related
circuit affected by
strong electrical noise.
Check if appropriate noise control measures have been
implemented (e.g., correct grounding and routing of signal wires,
communication cables, and main circuit wires).
Î Improve the noise control measures.
Î Separate the signal wires from main power wires as far as
possible.
[ 21 ] erd Step-out detection (for drive of permanent magnet synchronous motors)
Problem
The step-out of the PMSM was detected.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) Mismatch with the
characteristics of the
motor.
Check whether the settings of F04, F05, P02, P03, P60, P61, P62,
P63 agree with the motor parameters.
(2) Starting torque was
insufficient.
Check the settings of the acceleration time (F07, E10) and the
reference current at starting (P74).
Î Set the motor parameters to those function codes.
Î Change the acceleration time to match the load.
Î Increase the reference current value at starting.
Î Set the holding time of the starting frequency 1 (F24).
Î Set the S-curve (H07 = 1 or 2).
Î Increase the control switching level (P89).
(3) Load is light.
Check the setting of the reference current at starting (P74).
Î Decrease the reference current value at starting.
Set it to 80% or lower when running a motor alone in a test run
etc.
(4) Control system not
stabilized.
Check the settings of the armature resistance of PMSM (P60) and
the V/f damping control compensation gain (P91, P92).
Î Adjust the armature resistance of the motor.
Î Adjust the settings of the compensation gain (P91, P92).
6-23
6.4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is
Displayed
[1]
– – – – (center bar) appears
Problem
A center bar (– – – –) has appeared on the LED monitor.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) When the PID command
and its feedback amount
are selected as a
monitor item, the PID
control is disabled.
To view other monitor items: Check if E43 = 10 (PID command) or
12 (PID feedback amount).
Î Set E43 to a value other than "10" or "12."
To view a PID command or its feedback amount: Check if the PID
control is disabled (J01 = 0).
Î Set J01 to "1" (Enable process control, normal operation) or "2"
(Enable process control, inverse operation).
(2) When timer operation is
disabled (C21 = 0), timer
is selected as a monitor
item (E43 = 13).
When timer operation
had been enabled (C21
= 1) and timer had been
selected as a monitor
item by pressing the
key, you disabled timer
operation (C21 = 0).
(3) The remote keypad
(option) was poorly
connected.
To view other monitor items: Check if E32 = 13 (Timer).
Î Set E43 to a value other than "13."
To view timer (s): Check if C21 = 0 (Disable).
Î Set C21 to "1."
Prior to proceeding, check that pressing the
key does not
change the display on the LED monitor.
Check continuity of the extension cable for the keypad used in
remote operation.
Î Replace the extension cable.
Check the RJ-45 connector for damage.
Î Ensure the connector of the RJ-45 connector.
Î Replace the remote keypad (option).
[2]
_ _ _ _ (under bar) appears
Problem
key or entered a run forward command FWD or a run
Although you pressed the
reverse command REV, the motor did not start and an under bar ( _ _ _ _ ) appeared
on the LED monitor.
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) The DC link bus voltage
was low.
Select 5_01 under Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in
Programming mode on the keypad, then check the DC link bus
voltage that should be 200 VDC or below for three-phase 200 V
class series and 400 VDC or below for three-phase 400 V class
series.
Î Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input
specifications.
6-24
[3]
Problem
appears
Parentheses (
keypad.
) appeared on the LED monitor during speed monitoring on the
Possible Causes
What to Check and Suggested Measures
(1) The display data
overflows the LED
monitor.
Check whether the product of the output frequency and the display
coefficient (E50) exceeds 9999.
Î Correct the setting of E50.
6-25
Chapter 7
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
0B
Perform daily and periodic inspection to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation of the inverter for a
long time. When performing inspections, follow the instructions given in this chapter.
• Before proceeding to the maintenance and inspection, turn OFF the power and wait at least
five minutes. Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a
multimeter or a similar instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P(+) and
N(-) has dropped below the safe level (+25 VDC or below).
Electric shock may occur.
•
•
•
•
Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons.
Take off the watch, rings and other metallic objects before starting work.
Use insulated tools.
Never modify the inverter.
Electric shock or injuries could occur.
7.1 Daily Inspection
1B
Visually inspect the inverter for operation errors from the outside without removing the covers when
the inverter is ON or operating.
-
Check that the expected performance (satisfying the standard specifications) is obtained.
-
Check that the surrounding environment satisfies the requirements given in Chapter 2, Section
2.1 "Operating Environment."
-
Check that the LED monitor on the keypad displays normally.
-
Check for abnormal noise, odor, or excessive vibration.
-
Check for traces of overheat, discoloration and other defects.
7.2 Periodic Inspection
2B
Perform periodic inspection according to the items listed in Table 7.1. Before performing periodic
inspection, be sure to stop the motor, shut down the power to the inverter, and then remove the
terminal block covers.
Table 7.1 List of Periodic Inspections
Check part
Check item
How to inspect
Evaluation criteria
Environment
1) Check the ambient temperature,
humidity, vibration and atmosphere
(dust, gas, oil mist, or water drops).
2) Check that tools or other foreign
materials or dangerous objects are
not left around the equipment.
1) Check visually or
measure using
apparatus.
1) The standard
specification must
be satisfied.
2) Visual inspection
2) No foreign or
dangerous objects
are left.
Check that the input voltages of the
main and control circuit are correct.
Measure the voltages
using a multimeter or
the like.
The standard
specifications must
be satisfied.
Voltage
7-1
Table 7.1 List of Periodic Inspections (Continued)
Check part
Check item
How to inspect
Evaluation criteria
1) Check that the display is clear.
2) Check that there is no missing part
in the displayed characters.
1), 2)
Visual inspection
1), 2)
The display can
be read and
there is no fault.
Structure such
as frames and
covers
Check for:
1) Abnormal noise or excessive
vibration
2) Loose bolts (at clamp sections)
3) Deformation or breakage
4) Discoloration caused by overheat
5) Contamination or accumulation of
dust or dirt
1) Visual or auditory
inspection
2) Retighten.
3), 4), 5)
Visual inspection
1), 2), 3), 4), 5)
No abnormalities
Common
1) Check that bolts and screws are
tight and not missing.
2) Check the devices and insulators
for deformation, cracks, breakage
and discoloration caused by
overheat and deterioration.
3) Check for contamination and
accumulation of dust or dirt.
1) Retighten.
1), 2), 3)
No abnormalities
Conductors
and wires
1) Check conductors for discoloration
and distortion caused by overheat.
2) Check the sheath of the wires for
cracks and discoloration.
1), 2)
Visual inspection
1), 2)
No abnormalities
Terminal
blocks
Check that the terminal blocks are not
damaged.
Visual inspection
No abnormalities
DC link bus
capacitor
1) Check for electrolyte leakage,
discoloration, cracks and swelling
of the case.
2) Check that the safety valve does
not protrude remarkably.
3) Measure the capacitance if
necessary.
1), 2)
Visual inspection
1), 2)
No abnormalities
3) Measure the
discharge time
with capacitance
probe.
3) The discharge
time should not
be shorter than
the one specified
by the
replacement
manual.
1) Check for abnormal odor or cracks
in insulators, caused by overheat.
2) Check for broken wires.
1) Olfactory and
visual inspection
2) Check the wires
visually. Or
disconnect either
wire and measure
the conductivity
with a multimeter.
1) No abnormalities
Check for abnormal roaring noise and
odor.
Auditory, visual and
olfactory inspection
No abnormalities
Main circuit
Keypad
Braking
resistor
Transformer
and reactor
7-2
2), 3)
Visual inspection
2) Within ± 10% of
the resistance of
the braking
resistor
Table 7.1 List of Periodic Inspections (Continued)
Check item
How to inspect
Evaluation criteria
Magnetic
contactor
and relay
1) Check for chatters during
operation.
1) Hearing
inspection
2) Check for rough contacts.
2) Visual inspection
Printed
circuit
boards
1) Check for loose screws and
connectors.
2) Check for abnormal odor and
discoloration.
3) Check for cracks, breakage,
deformation and remarkable rust.
4) Check the capacitors for
electrolyte leaks and deformation.
1) Retighten.
Cooling fan
1) Check for abnormal noise and
excessive vibration.
1) Auditory and
visual inspection,
or turn manually
(be sure to turn
the power OFF).
2) Retighten.
3) Visual inspection
1) Smooth rotation
Visual inspection
No abnormalities
Cooling system
Control circuit
Main circuit
Check part
2) Check for loose bolts.
3) Check for discoloration caused by
overheat.
Ventilation
path
Check the heat sink, intake and
exhaust ports for clogging and foreign
materials.
1), 2)
No abnormalities
1), 2), 3), 4)
No abnormalities
2) Olfactory and
visual inspection
3), 4)
Visual inspection
2), 3)
No abnormalities
Remove dust accumulating on the inverter with a vacuum cleaner. If the inverter is stained, wipe it off
with a chemically neutral cloth.
7.3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts
3B
The inverter consists of many electronic parts including semiconductor devices. Table 7.2 lists
replacement parts that should be periodically replaced for preventive maintenance (Use the lifetime
judgment function as a guide). These parts are likely to deteriorate with age due to their constitution
and properties, leading to the decreased performance or failure of the inverter.
When the replacement is necessary, consult your Fuji Electric representative.
Table 7.2 Replacement Parts
Standard replacement intervals
(See Note below.)
Part name
DC link bus capacitor
10 years
Electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards
10 years
Cooling fan
10 years
(Note) These replacement intervals are based on the inverter's service life estimated under the following
conditions.
- Ambient temperature: 40°C
- Load factor: 80% of the rated current given in parentheses ( ) in Chapter 8 "Specifications"
- Running 12 hours/day
In environments with an ambient temperature above 40°C or a large amount of dust or dirt, the
replacement intervals may be shorter.
Standard replacement intervals mentioned above are only a guide for replacement, not a guaranteed
service life.
7-3
7.3.1
Judgment on service life
7B
(1) Viewing data necessary for judging service life; Measurement procedures
Through Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in Programming mode, you can view on the keypad
various data (as a guideline) necessary for judging whether key components such as the DC link bus
capacitor, electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards, and cooling fan are approaching their
service life.
-1 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor (in comparison with initial one at
shipment)
Measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor according to the procedure given below. The
result will be displayed on the keypad as a ratio (%) to the initial capacitance at the time of factory
shipment.
-------------------------------------- Procedure for measuring capacitance -------------------------------------1)
To ensure validity in the comparative measurement, put the condition of the inverter back to the
state at factory shipment.
• Remove the option card (if already in use) from the inverter.
•
In case another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P(+) and N(-) terminals of the
main circuit, disconnect the wires. (You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor (optional), if
any.)
•
If the standard keypad has been replaced with an optional remote keypad after the purchase,
put back the original standard keypad.
•
Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals [FWD], [REV], and [X1] through [X3] of
the control circuit.
•
If a potentiometer is connected to terminal [13], disconnect it.
•
If an external apparatus is attached to terminal [PLC], disconnect it.
•
Ensure that transistor output signal ([Y1]) and relay output signals ([30A/B/C]) will not be
turned ON.
If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals, they
are considered ON when the inverter is not running. Specify positive logic for them.
•
2)
Keep the ambient temperature within 25 ±10°C.
Switch ON the main circuit power.
3)
Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state.
4)
Switch OFF the main circuit power.
5)
Start the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor. Make sure that " . . . . "
appears on the LED monitor.
If " . . . . " does not appear on the LED monitor, the measurement will not start. Check
the conditions listed in 1).
6)
Once " . . . . " has disappeared from the LED monitor, switch ON the main circuit power again.
7)
Select Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in Programming mode and note the reading (relative
capacitance (%) of the DC link bus capacitor).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7-4
-2 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor (during power-off time under ordinary
operating condition)
If the measuring method for discharging condition of the DC link bus capacitor during a power-off
time under the ordinary operating condition at the end user’s installation is different from the initial
measuring method at the time of factory shipment, the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitors can
not be measured. Follow the procedure mentioned below when you measure the capacitance of the
DC link bus capacitors under the ordinary operating condition at the end user's installation.
------------------------------ Procedure for setting up measurement condition -----------------------------1)
Set function code H98 (Protection/maintenance function) to enable the user to specify the
judgment criteria for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor (Bit 3) (refer to function code
H98).
2)
Place the inverter in stopped state.
3)
Place the inverter in the state of power-off under ordinary operating conditions.
4)
Set both function codes H42 (Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor) and H47 (Initial capacitance
of DC link bus capacitor) to "0000."
5)
Switch OFF the inverter.
Measure the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and save the result in function code
H47 (Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor).
The condition under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically
collected and saved.
During the measurement, " . . . . " appears on the LED monitor.
6)
Switch ON the inverter again. Confirm that H42 (Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor) and H47
(Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor) hold right values. Move to Menu #5 "Maintenance
Information" and confirm that the relative capacitance (ratio to full capacitance) is 100%.
If the measurement has failed, "0001" is entered into both H42 and H47. Check
whether there has been any mistake in operation and conduct the measurement
again.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------To change the settings back to the state at the time of factory shipment, set H47 (Initial capacitance
of DC link bus capacitor) to "0002"; the original values will be restored.
Hereafter, each time the inverter is switched OFF, the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor is
automatically measured if the above condition is met.
The condition given above produces a rather large measurement error. If this mode gives
you a lifetime alarm, set H98 (Maintenance operation) back to the default setting (Bit 3
(Specify service life criteria for replacing the DC link bus capacitor) = 0) and conduct the
measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment.
Electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards
Move to Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in Programming mode and check the cumulative run
time of the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards. This value is calculated from the
cumulative total number of hours a voltage has been applied on the electrolytic capacitor. The value
is displayed on the LED monitor in units of 1000 hours.
7-5
Cooling fan
Select Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" and check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan. The
inverter accumulates hours for which the cooling fan has run. The display is in units of 1000 hours.
The cumulative time should be used just a guide since the actual service life will be significantly
affected by the temperature and operation environment.
(2) Early warning of lifetime alarm
For the components listed in Table 7.3, you can get an early warning of lifetime alarm at the transistor
output terminal [Y1] and the relay contact terminals [30A/B/C] as soon as any of the conditions listed
under the "Judgment level" column has been exceeded. When the replacement data of any parts
exceeds the judgment level, this signal comes ON.
Table 7.3 Criteria for Issuing a Lifetime Alarm
Parts to be replaced
Judgment level
DC link bus capacitor
85% or lower of the initial capacitance at shipment
Electrolytic capacitors on the
printed circuit boards
87000 hours or longer as cumulative run time
Cooling fan
87000 hours or longer as cumulative run time
(Estimated service life at the inverter’s ambient temperature of
40°C under 80% of full load when running 12 hours/day)
(Estimated service life at the inverter’s ambient temperature of
40°C under 80% of full load when running 12 hours/day)
7.4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit
4B
Because the voltage and current of the power supply (input, primary circuit) of the main circuit of the
inverter and those of the motor (output, secondary circuit) contain harmonic components, the
readings may vary with the type of the meter. Use meters indicated in Table 7.4 when measuring with
meters for commercial frequencies.
The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power-factor meter that
measures the phase difference between the voltage and current. To obtain the power factor,
measure the power, voltage and current on each of the input and output sides and use the following
formula.
„ Three-phase input
Power factor =
Electric power (W)
„ Single-phase input
× 100 %
3×Voltage (V)×Current (A)
7-6
Power factor =
Electric power (W)
× 100 %
Voltage (V) × Current (A)
Symbol of
meter
Type of
meter
Name of
meter
Waveform
Item
Table 7.4 Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit
Input (primary) side
Voltage
Ammeter
AR, AS, AT
DC link bus
voltage
(P (+)-N (-))
Output (secondary) side
Current
Voltage
Voltmeter
VR, VS, VT
Wattmeter
W R, W T
Rectifier or
Moving iron
moving iron
type
type
Digital
AC power
meter
⎯
Ammeter
AU, AV, AW
Current
Voltmeter
VU, VV, VW
Wattmeter
W U, WW
Digital AC
Digital AC
Digital AC
power meter power meter power meter
⎯
⎯
DC voltmeter
V
Moving coil
type
⎯
It is not recommended that meters other than a digital AC power meter be used for
measuring the output voltage or output current since they may cause larger
measurement errors or, in the worst case, they may be damaged.
Figure 7.1 Connection of Meters
7-7
7.5 Insulation Test
5B
Since the inverter has undergone an insulation test before shipment, avoid making a Megger test at
the customer's site.
If a Megger test is unavoidable for the main circuit, observe the following instructions; otherwise, the
inverter may be damaged.
A withstand voltage test may also damage the inverter if the test procedure is wrong. When the
withstand voltage test is necessary, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
(1) Megger test of main circuit
1) Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power supply without fail during measurement.
2) If the test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring, disconnect all the wiring from the
control circuit.
3) Connect the main circuit terminals with a common line as shown in Figure 7.2.
4) The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground
( ).
5) Value of 5 MΩ or more displayed on the Megger indicates a correct state. (The value is measured
on an inverter alone.)
Figure 7.2 Main Circuit Terminal Connection for Megger Test
(2) Insulation test of control circuit
Do not make a Megger test or withstand voltage test for the control circuit. Use a high resistance
range tester for the control circuit.
1) Disconnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals.
2) Perform a continuity test to the ground. One MΩ or a larger measurement indicates a correct
state.
(3) Insulation test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit
Disconnect all the wiring connected to the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the
inverter.
7-8
7.6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee
6B
7.6.1
When making an inquiry
8B
Upon breakage of the product, uncertainties, failure or inquiries, inform your Fuji Electric
representative of the following information.
1) Inverter type (Refer to Chapter 1, Section 1.1.)
2) SER No. (serial number of equipment) (Refer to Chapter 1, Section 1.1.)
3) Function codes and their data that you changed from the factory defaults (Refer to Chapter 3,
Section 3.4.2.)
4) ROM version (Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.5.)
5) Date of purchase
6) Inquiries (for example, point and extent of breakage, uncertainties, failure phenomena, and other
circumstances)
7) Production year & week (Refer to Chapter 1, Section 1.1.)
7.6.2
Product warranty
9B
To all our customers who purchase Fuji Electric products included in this documentation:
Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order.
U
When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials,
please be aware that any items such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the
contract, catalog, specifications or other materials will be as mentioned below.
In addition, the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the
place where they can be used, etc., and may require periodic inspection. Please confirm these
points with your sales representative or directly with this company.
Furthermore, regarding purchased products and delivered products, we request that you take
adequate consideration of the necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management
and maintenance even before receiving your products.
[ 1 ] Free of charge warranty period and warranty range
(1) Free of charge warranty period
1) The product warranty period is ''1 year from the date of purchase'' or 24 months from the
manufacturing date imprinted on the name place, whichever date is earlier.
2) However, in cases where the use environment, conditions of use, use frequency and times
used, etc., have an effect on product life, this warranty period may not apply.
3) Furthermore, the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric's Service Department is
''6 months from the date that repairs are completed.''
7-9
(2) Warranty range
1) In the event that breakdown occurs during the product's warranty period which is the
responsibility of Fuji Electric, Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has
broken down free of charge at the place where the product was purchased or where it was
delivered. However, if the following cases are applicable, the terms of this warranty may not
apply.
c The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions, environment, handling or use
methods, etc. which are not specified in the catalog, operation manual, specifications or
other relevant documents.
d The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji's
product.
e The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji's product, such as the
customer's equipment or software design, etc.
f Concerning the Fuji's programmable products, the breakdown was caused by a program
other than a program supplied by this company, or the results from using such a program.
g The breakdown was caused by modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji
Electric.
h The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using
consumables, etc. specified in the operation manual or catalog, etc.
i The breakdown was caused by a science or technical problem that was not foreseen
when making practical application of the product at the time it was purchased or
delivered.
j The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used.
k The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company's responsibility, such
as lightning or other disaster.
(2) Furthermore, the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered
product alone.
(3) The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item (1) above and any
damages (damage to or loss of machinery or equipment, or lost profits from the same, etc.)
consequent to or resulting from breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be
excluded from coverage by this warranty.
(3) Trouble diagnosis
As a rule, the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis. However, at the
customer's request, this company or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a
chargeable basis. In this case, the customer is asked to assume the burden for charges levied in
accordance with this company's fee schedule.
[ 2 ] Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity, etc.
Regardless of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period, this
company shall not be liable for any loss of opportunity, loss of profits, or damages arising from
special circumstances, secondary damages, accident compensation to another company, or
damages to products other than this company's products, whether foreseen or not by this company,
which this company is not be responsible for causing.
7-10
[ 3 ] Repair period after production stop, spare parts supply period (holding period)
Concerning models (products) which have gone out of production, this company will perform repairs
for a period of 7 years after production stop, counting from the month and year when the production
stop occurs. In addition, we will continue to supply the spare parts required for repairs for a period of
7 years, counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs. However, if it is
estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is short and it will be difficult to
procure or produce those parts, there may be cases where it is difficult to provide repairs or supply
spare parts even within this 7-year period. For details, please confirm at our company's business
office or our service office.
[ 4 ] Transfer rights
In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application
program, the products shall be transported to and transferred to the customer and this company
shall not be responsible for local adjustments or trial operation.
[ 5 ] Service contents
The cost of purchased and delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or
service costs. Depending on the request, these can be discussed separately.
[ 6 ] Applicable scope of service
Above contents shall be assumed to apply to transactions and use of the country where you
purchased the products.
Consult the local supplier or Fuji for the detail separately.
7-11
Chapter 8
SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Standard Models
8.1.1
Three-phase 200 V class series (… = A, U)
Item
Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _ C2S-2…)
Applicable motor rating (kW)
*1
(when … = A)
Applicable motor rating (HP)
*1
(when … = U)
Braking
Input Ratings
Output Ratings
Rated capacity (kVA)
*2
Rated voltage (V) *3
0002
0004
0006
0010
0012
0020
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
1/8
1/4
1/2
1
2
3
5
0.30
0.57
1.3
2.0
3.5
4.5
7.2
12.0
(10.0)
19.1
(16.5)
Three-phase, 200 to 240 V (with AVR function)
0.8
(0.7)
Rated current (A) *4
Overload capability
0001
1.5
(1.4)
3.5
(2.5)
5.5
(4.2)
9.2
(7.0)
150% of rated output current for 1 min.
150% of rated output current for 1 min or 200% of rated output current
for 0.5 s (for the rated current given in parentheses)
Rated frequency (Hz)
50/60 Hz
Phases, voltage,
frequency
Three-phase, 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Voltage and
frequency variations
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less) *5,
Frequency: +5 to -5%
(w/
DCR)
0.57
0.93
1.6
3.0
5.7
8.3
14.0
(w/o
DCR)
1.1
1.8
3.1
5.3
9.5
13.2
22.2
Required power
supply capacity (kVA)
*7
0.2
0.3
0.6
1.1
2.0
2.9
4.9
Rated
current (A)
*6
Torque (%) *8
DC braking
150
100
50
Braking transistor
--
Built-in
Applicable safety standards
UL508C, IEC 61800-5-1: 2007 (under application)
Enclosure
IP20 (IEC 60529:1989), UL open type (UL50)
Cooling method
Mass (kg)
*1
*2
*3
*4
30
Braking starting frequency*9: 0.0 to 60.0 Hz,
Braking time: 0.0 to 30.0 s, Braking level: 0 to 100%
Natural cooling
0.6
0.6
0.7
Fan cooling
0.8
1.7
1.7
2.5
Fuji 4-pole standard motors
Refers to the rated capacity assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V.
Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
The load shall be reduced so that the continuous operating current is the rated current in parentheses or less if
the carrier frequency is set to 3 kHz or above or the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C.
*5 Interphase voltage unbalance (%) =
Max. voltage (V) - Min.voltage (V)
× 67 (Refer to IEC 61800 - 3 : 2004)
3 - phase average voltage (V)
If this value is 2 to 3%, use an optional AC reactor (ACR).
*6 Refers to the estimated value to apply when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA (inverter capacity x 10 when
the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and the inverter is connected to the %X = 5% power supply.
*7 Refers to the value to apply when a DC reactor (DCR) is used.
*8 Refers to the average braking torque to apply when the motor running alone decelerates from 60 Hz with the
AVR control being OFF. (It varies with the efficiency of the motor.)
*9 Available only for induction motor drive.
Note: A box (…) in the above table replaces A or U depending on the shipping destination.
8-1
8.1.2
Three-phase 400 V class series (… = A, C, E, U)
Item
Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _ _ C2S-4…)
0002
0004
0005
0007
0011
Applicable motor rating (kW)
*1
(when … = A, C or E)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
(4.0)*
Applicable motor rating (HP)
*1
(when … = U)
1/2
1
2
3
5
1.3
2.3
3.2
4.8
8.0
6.3
(5.5)
10.5
(9.0)
Braking
Input Ratings
Output Ratings
Rated capacity (kVA)
*2
Rated voltage (V) *3
Three-phase, 380 to 480 V (with AVR function)
1.8
(1.5)
Rated current (A)
Overload capability
3.1
(2.5)
4.3
(3.7)
150% of rated output current for 1 min.
150% of rated output current for 1 min or 200% of rated output current
for 0.5 s (for the rated current given in parentheses)
Rated frequency (Hz)
50/60 Hz
Phases, voltage,
frequency
Three-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Voltage and
frequency variations
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Interphase voltage unbalance: 2% or less) *5,
Frequency: +5 to -5%
(w/
DCR)
0.85
1.6
3.0
4.4
7.3
(w/o
DCR)
1.7
3.1
5.9
8.2
13.0
Required power
supply capacity (kVA)
*7
0.6
1.1
2.0
2.9
4.9
Rated
current (A)
*6
Torque (%) *8
DC braking
100
50
30
Braking starting frequency*9: 0.0 to 60.0 Hz,
Braking time: 0.0 to 30.0 s, Braking level: 0 to 100%
Braking transistor
Built-in
Applicable safety standards
UL508C, IEC 61800-5-1: 2007 (under application)
Enclosure
IP20 (IEC 60529:1989), UL open type (UL50)
Cooling method
Mass (kg)
Natural cooling
1.2
1.3
Fan cooling
1.7
1.7
2.5
* 4.0 kW for the EU. The inverter type is FRN0011C2S-4E.
*1 Fuji 4-pole standard motors
*2 Refers to the rated capacity assuming the rated output voltage as 440 V.
*3 Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
*5 Interphase voltage unbalance (%) =
Max. voltage (V) - Min.voltage (V)
× 67 (Refer to IEC 61800 - 3 : 2004)
3 - phase average voltage (V)
If this value is 2 to 3%, use an optional AC reactor (ACR).
*6 Refers to the estimated value to apply when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA (inverter capacity x 10 when
the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and the inverter is connected to the %X = 5% power supply.
*7 Refers to the value to apply when a DC reactor (DCR) is used.
*8 Refers to the average braking torque to apply when the motor running alone decelerates from 60 Hz with the
AVR control being OFF. (It varies with the efficiency of the motor.)
*9 Available only for induction motor drive.
Note: A box (…) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination.
8-2
8.1.3
Single-phase 200 V class series (… = A, C, E, U)
Item
Specifications
0001
0002
0004
0006
0010
0012
Applicable motor rating (kW)
*1
(when … = A, C or E)
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
Applicable motor rating (HP)
*1
(when … = U)
1/8
1/4
1/2
1
2
3
0.30
0.57
1.3
2.0
3.5
4.5
9.2
(7.0)
12.0
(10.0)
Braking
Input Ratings
Output Ratings
Type (FRN_ _ _ _ C2S-7…)
Rated capacity (kVA)
*2
Rated voltage (V) *3
Rated current (A) *4
Overload capability
Three-phase, 200 to 240 V (with AVR function)
0.8
(0.7)
1.5
(1.4)
3.5
(2.5)
5.5
(4.2)
150% of rated output current for 1 min or 200% of rated output current
for 0.5 s
Rated frequency (Hz)
50/60 Hz
Phases, voltage,
frequency
Single-phase, 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Voltage and
frequency variations
Voltage: +10 to -15%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
(w/
DCR)
1.1
2.0
3.5
6.4
11.6
17.5
(w/o
DCR)
1.8
3.3
5.4
9.7
16.4
24.0
Required power
supply capacity (kVA)
*7
0.3
0.4
0.7
1.3
2.4
3.5
50
30
Rated
current (A)
*6
Torque (%) *8
DC braking
150
100
Braking starting frequency*9: 0.0 to 60.0 Hz,
Braking time: 0.0 to 30.0 s, Braking level: 0 to 100%
Braking transistor
--
Built-in
Applicable safety
standards
UL508C, IEC 61800-5-1: 2007 (under application)
Enclosure
IP20 (IEC 60529:1989), UL open type (UL50)
Cooling method
Mass (kg)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*6
*7
*8
*9
Natural cooling
0.6
0.6
0.7
Fan cooling
0.9
1.8
2.5
Fuji 4-pole standard motors
Refers to the rated capacity assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V.
Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
The load shall be reduced so that the continuous operating current is the rated current in parentheses or less if
the carrier frequency is set to 3 kHz or above or the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C.
Refers to the estimated value to apply when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA (inverter capacity x 10 when
the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and the inverter is connected to the %X = 5% power supply.
Refers to the value to apply when a DC reactor (DCR) is used.
Refers to the average braking torque to apply when the motor running alone decelerates from 60 Hz with the
AVR control being OFF. (It varies with the efficiency of the motor.)
Available only for induction motor drive.
Note: A box (…) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination.
8-3
8.2 Common Specifications
Item
Setting range
Explanation
25.0 to 400.0 Hz variable
Base frequency
25.0 to 400.0 Hz variable
Starting frequency
0.1 to 60.0 Hz variable
Carrier frequency
0.75 to 16 kHz variable
Note: To protect the inverter, when the carrier frequency is 6 kHz or
more, the carrier frequency automatically lowers depending upon
the ambient temperature or output current states. (The automatic
lowering function can be disabled.) *1
Output frequency
accuracy (Stability)
• Analog setting: ±2% of max freq. (at 25°C), temperature drift:
±0.2% of max freq. (at 25±10°C)
• Keypad setting: ±0.01% of max freq. (at 25°C), temperature drift:
±0.01% of max freq. (at 25±10°C)
Frequency setting
resolution
• Analog setting: 1/1000 of maximum frequency
• Keypad setting: 0.01 Hz (99.99 Hz or less), 0.1 Hz (100.0 to 400.0
Hz)
• Link setting:
1/20000 of maximum frequency or 0.01 Hz (fixed)
Control system
Driving induction motor (IM)
• V/f control, slip compensation, auto torque boost
• Dynamic torque vector control, automatic energy saving control
Driving permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) (without
speed / position sensor) *2
• Speed control range: 10% or more of the base frequency
Voltage/frequency
characteristics
200 V
series
• Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and
at maximum output frequency (80 to 240 V).
• The AVR control *1 can be turned ON or OFF.
• Non-linear V/f *1 setting (2 points): Free voltage (0 to
240 V) and frequency (0 to 400 Hz) can be set.
400 V
series
• Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and
at maximum output frequency (160 to 500 V).
• The AVR control *1 can be turned ON or OFF.
• Non-linear V/f *1 setting (2 points): Free voltage (0 to
500 V) and frequency (0 to 400 Hz) can be set.
Control
Output frequency
Maximum
frequency
Torque boost *1
• Auto torque boost (For constant torque load)
• Manual torque boost: Torque boost value can be set between 0.0
and 20.0%.
• Select application load with the function code. (For variable torque
load or constant torque load)
Starting torque *1
• 150% or more (Running at 1 Hz, with slip compensation and auto
torque boost active)
Start/stop operation
Keypad: Start and stop with RUN and STOP keys (standard keypad/
optional remote keypad)
External signals (digital inputs): Run forward and stop command,
Run reverse and stop command, coast-to-stop command, etc.
Link operation: Operation through RS-485 (built-in as standard)
*1 Available only for induction motor drive.
*2 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
8-4
Item
Frequency setting
Explanation
Keypad operation using the
and
keys (with data protection
function)
Also can be set with function code (only via communication) and be
copied. *2
Built-in potentiometer
Analog input: 0 to ±10 V DC / 0 to 100% (terminal [12]),
4 to 20 mA / 0 to 100%, 0 to 20 mA / 0 to 100%
(terminal [C1])
Multistep frequency:
Selectable from 16 different frequencies (step 0 to 15)
UP/DOWN operation:
Frequency can be increased or decreased while the digital input
signal is ON.
Link operation:
Frequency can be specified through RS-485 communications link.
Frequency setting switching:
Two types of frequency settings can be switched with an external
signal (digital input). Switchable to frequency settings given through
the communications link or multistep frequency setting.
Control
Auxiliary frequency setting:
Each of inputs from the built-in potentiometer and terminal [12]/[C1]
can be added to the main setting as auxiliary frequency settings.
Inverse operation:
Switchable from "0 to +10 VDC/0 to 100%" to "+10 to 0 VDC/0 to
100%" by external signals.
Switchable from "4 to 20 mA DC (0 to 20 mA DC)/0 to 100%" to "20
to 4 mA DC (20 to 0 mA DC)/0 to 100%" by external signals.
Acceleration/
deceleration time
• Setting range: 0.00 to 3600 s, variable
• The two types of acceleration/deceleration time settings can be
made or selected individually (switchable during running).
• Acceleration/deceleration pattern: Acceleration and deceleration
pattern can be selected from 4 types: Linear, S-curve (weak), Scurve (strong), and Curvilinear (maximum
acceleration/deceleration capacity of constant output).
• Shutoff of a run command causes the motor to coast to a stop.
• The acceleration/deceleration time for jogging can be set. (Setting
range: 0.00 to 3600 s)
Various functions
Frequency limiter (peak and bottom limiters), Bias frequency, Gain
for frequency command, Jump frequency control, Jogging operation
*1, Timer operation, Restart after momentary power failure *1, Slip
compensation *1, Deceleration characteristics (Forced brake
control), Current limit (Hardware current limiter) *1, PID control,
Automatic deceleration, Overload prevention control, Auto energy
saving operation *1, Cooling fan ON/OFF control, Offline tuning *1,
Rotation direction limitation, and 2nd motor settings
*1 Available only for induction motor drive.
*2 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
8-5
Item
Explanation
Speed monitor, output current (A), output voltage (V), input power
(kW), PID command value, PID feedback value, PID output, timer (s)
and input watt-hour (kWh).
 Select the speed monitor to be displayed from the following:
Output frequency (before slip compensation) (Hz), output frequency
(after slip compensation) (Hz), reference frequency (Hz), load shaft
speed (min-1), line speed (m/min), constant feeding rate time (min).
*Speed monitor can display the speed specified with E48.
When tripped
Displays the cause of trip by
codes as follows.
• 0c1 (Overcurrent during
acceleration)
• 0c2 (Overcurrent during
deceleration)
• 0c3 (Overcurrent at constant
speed)
• lin (Input phase loss)
(Undervoltage)
• lu
• 0pl (Output phase loss)
• 0u1 (Overvoltage during
acceleration)
• 0u2v (Overvoltage during
deceleration)
• 0u3v (Overvoltage during
constant speed)
• 0h1 (Overheating of the heat
sink)
• 0h2 (External thermal relay
tripped)
• 0h4 (Motor protection (PTC
thermistor))
• dbh (Braking resistor
overheat)
• cof (PID feedback wire
break)
Display
During running/stop
0l1
0l2
0lu
er1
er2
• er3
• er6
• er7
• er8
• erf
• err
• erd
(Motor overload)
(Motor 2 overload)
(Inverter unit overload)
(Memory error)
(Keypad
communications error)
(CPU error)
(Operation procedure
error)
(Tuning error)
(RS-485 error)
(Data save error due to
undervoltage)
(Mock alarm)
(Step-out detection (for
drive of permanent
magnet synchronous
motors)) *2
Protection
Trip history: The causes (codes) of the last four trips are saved and
displayed.
The detailed running status data of the last four trips are also saved
and displayed.
Refer to Section 8.5 "Protective Functions."
Environment
During running or
when tripped
•
•
•
•
•
Refer to the Chapter 2, Section 2.1 "Operating Environment" and Chapter 1, Section 1.4,
"Storage Environment."
*2 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
8-6
8.3 Terminal Specifications
8.3.1
Terminal functions
For details about the main and control circuit terminals, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.3.5 and
Section 2.3.6 (Table 2.8), respectively.
8.3.2
Connection diagram in operation by external signal inputs
* With a built-in terminating
resistor switch
(Note 1) Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or a residual-current-operated
protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) in the
primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring. Do not use an MCCB or RCD/ELCB whose
capacity exceeds the recommended rated current.
(Note 2) A magnetic contactor (MC) should, if necessary, be mounted independent of the MCCB or ELCB
to cut off the power fed to the inverter. Refer to page 9-2 for details. MCs or solenoids that will be
installed close to the inverter require surge absorbers to be connected in parallel to their coils.
(Note 3) When connecting a DC reactor (option), remove the jumper bar from terminals [P1] and [P+].
(Note 4) The THR function can be used by assigning "9" (External alarm) to any of terminals [X1] to [X3],
[FWD] or [REV] (function code E01 to E03, E98, or E99). For details, refer to Chapter 9.
(Note 5) Frequency can be set by connecting a frequency setting device (external potentiometer)
between terminals [11], [12], and [13] instead of inputting voltage signal (0 to +10 VDC or 0 to +5
VDC) between terminals [12] and [11].
8-7
(Note 6) For the wiring of the control circuit, use shielded or twisted wires. When using shielded wires,
connect the shields to earth. To prevent malfunction due to noise, keep the control circuit wiring
away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible (recommended: 10 cm or longer), and never
set them in the same wire duct. When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit
wiring, set them at right angles.
(Note 7) It is recommended for noise control that 3-phase, 4-wire cable be used for the motor wiring.
Connect grounding wires of the motor to the grounding terminal zG on the inverter.
The basic connection diagram above is for running/stopping the inverter and setting the frequency
with external signals. Given below are connection notes.
(1) Set function code F02 to "1" (External signals).
(2) Set function code F01 to "1" (Voltage input to terminal [12]) or "2" (Current input to terminal
[C1]).
(3) Short-circuit terminals [FWD] and [CM] to run the motor in the forward direction and opening
them to stop it. Short-circuit terminals [REV] and [CM] to run the motor in the reverse direction
and opening them to stop it.
(4) Frequency by voltage input is within the range from 0 to +10 VDC or 0 to the maximum
frequency. Frequency by current input is within the range from +4 to +20 mADC or 0 to the
maximum frequency.
8-8
8.4 External Dimensions
8.4.1
Standard models
Power
supply
voltage
Inverter type
D
FRN0001C2S-2†
Threephase
200 V
Dimensions
(mm)
FRN0002C2S-2†
FRN0004C2S-2†
D1
80
95
10
70
FRN0006C2S-2† 120
FRN0001C2S-7†
Singlephase
200 V
FRN0002C2S-7†
FRN0004C2S-7†
80
Threephase
400 V
Inverter type
25
50
70
95
10
25
FRN0006C2S-7† 140 90
Power
supply
voltage
D2
50
Dimensions
(mm)
D
D1
FRN0002C2S-4† 115
D2
40
75
FRN0004C2S-4† 139
64
Note: A box (†) in the above tables replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination.
For three-phase 200 V series of inverters, it replaces A or U.
8-9
Power
supply
voltage
Inverter type
D
Threephase
200 V
FRN0010C2S-2†
Threephase
400 V
FRN0005C2S-4†
Singlephase
200 V
Dimensions
(mm)
D1
D2
FRN0012C2S-2†
139 75
64
FRN0007C2S-4†
FRN0010C2S-7† 149 85
Power supply
voltage
Inverter type
Three-phase
200 V
FRN0020C2S-2†
Three-phase
400 V
FRN0011C2S-4†
Single-phase
200 V
FRN0012C2S-7†
Note: A box (†) in the above tables replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination.
For three-phase 200 V series of inverters, it replaces A or U.
8-10
8.5 Protective Functions
"—": Not applicable.
Name
Overcurrent
protection
Short-circuit
protection
Ground fault
protection
- Stops the inverter output to protect the
inverter from an overcurrent resulting from
overload.
- Stops the inverter output to protect the
inverter from an overcurrent due to a short
circuit in the output circuit.
- Stops the inverter output to protect the
inverter from an overcurrent due to a ground
fault in the output circuit. This protection is
effective only when the inverter starts. If you
turn on the inverter without removing the
ground fault, this protection may not work.
Overvoltage
protection
Stops the inverter output upon detection of
overvoltage (400 VDC for 200 V series and 800
VDC for 400 V series) in the DC link bus.
This protection is not assured if excess AC line
voltage is applied inadvertently.
Undervoltage
protection
LED
Alarm
monitor
output
displays [30A,B,C]
Description
During
acceleration
0c1
During
deceleration
0c2
During running
at constant
speed
0c3
During
acceleration
0u1
During
deceleration
0u2
During running
at constant
speed
(Stopped)
0u3
Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage drops
below the undervoltage level (200 VDC for 200 V series and 400
VDC for 400 V series).
However, when F14 = 4 or 5, no alarm is output even if the DC link
bus voltage drops.
lu
Yes
Yes
Yes
(Note)
lin
Yes
Output phase
loss protection
Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of running and
during running, stopping the inverter output.
0pl
Yes
Inverter
- Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat sink
temperature in case of cooling fan failure or overload.
0h1
Yes
Braking
resistor
- Protects the braking resistor from overheat in accordance with
the setting of the electronic thermal overload relay for braking
resistor.
* It is necessary to set the function code data according to the
braking resistor used (built-in or external).
dbh
Yes
Stops the inverter output according to the inverter heat sink
temperature and the switching element temperature calculated
from the output current.
0lu
Yes
Overheat protection
Input phase loss Detects input phase loss, stopping the inverter output. This
protection
function prevents the inverter from undergoing heavy stress that
may be caused by input phase loss or inter-phase voltage
unbalance and may damage the inverter.
If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the
inverter, this function may not detect input phase loss if any.
In single-phase series of inverters, this function is disabled by
factory default.
Overload
protection
(Note) No alarm output depending upon the data setting of the function code.
8-11
Name
LED
Alarm
monitor
output
displays [30A,B,C]
Description
0l1
0l2
Yes
0h4
Yes
Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the motor is
stopped by the electronic thermal function for the purpose of
protecting the motor.
—
—
Stall prevention
Operates if the inverter's output current exceeds the instantaneous
overcurrent limit level, avoiding tripping of the inverter (during
constant speed operation or during acceleration).
—
—
External alarm
input
Stops the inverter output with an alarm through the digital input
signal THR.
0h2
Yes
Alarm relay
output
(for any fault)
The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the inverter issues
an alarm and stops the inverter output.
—
Yes
er1
Yes
Remote keypad The inverter stops by detecting a communication error between the
inverter and the remote keypad (option) during operation from the
(option)
communications remote keypad.
error
er2
Yes
CPU error
If the inverter detects a CPU error caused by noise or some other
factor, the inverter stops.
er3
Yes
Operation error
STOP key Pressing the
key on the keypad forces the inverter
to decelerate and stop the motor even if the inverter is
priority
running by any run commands given via the terminals
or communications (link operation). After the motor
stops, the inverter issues alarm er6.
er6
Yes
Motor protection
Electronic
thermal
overload
relay
Stops the inverter output in accordance with the setting of the
electronic thermal overload relay to protect the motor.
This function protects general-purpose motors and inverter motors
over the entire frequency range, as well as protecting the 2nd
motor.
* The operation level and thermal time constant (0.5 to 75.0
minutes) can be set.
PTC
thermistor
A PTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for motor
protection.
A PTC thermistor is connected between terminals [C1] and [11],
and a resistor is connected between terminals [13] and [C1].
Overload
early
warning
< Alarm Reset >
The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the
digital input signal RST.
key or by the
< Saving the alarm history and detailed data >
The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved and
displayed.
Memory error
The inverter checks memory data after power-on and when the
data is written. If a memory error is detected, the inverter stops.
Start
check
function
Inverters prohibit any run operations and displays
er6 on the LED monitor if a run command is present
at the time of any of the following status changes.
- Powering up
- An alarm (
key turned ON) is released or an
alarm reset (RST) is input.
- Link command (LE) has switched inverter
operation and the run command in the source to
be switched is active.
8-12
Name
Description
LED
Alarm
monitor
output
displays [30A,B,C]
Tuning error *1
Stops the inverter output when a tuning failure, interruption, or
abnormal tuning result is detected during tuning of motor
parameters.
er7
Yes
RS-485
communication
error
Upon detection of an RS-485 communications error, the inverter
stops its output.
er8
Yes
Data save error
during
undervoltage
If the data could not be saved during activation of the undervoltage
protection function, the inverter displays the alarm code.
erf
Yes
Retry function
When the inverter stops due to a trip, this function automatically
resets the inverter and restarts it.
—
—
Surge protection Protects the inverter against surge voltages which might appear
between one of the power lines for the main circuit and the ground.
—
—
Protection
against
momentary
power failure
Upon detection of a momentary power failure lasting 15 ms or
more, this function stops the inverter output.
—
—
Overload
prevention
control
In the event of overheating of the cooling fan or an overload
condition (alarm display: 0h1 or 0lu ), the output frequency of
the inverter is reduced to keep the inverter from tripping.
—
—
Mock alarm
A mock alarm can be generated with keypad operations to check
the failure sequence.
err
Yes
PID feedback
wire break
detection
Upon detection of a PID feedback wire break, this function outputs
an alarm.
cof
Yes
Step-out
detection *2
Upon detection of a step-out of PMSM, the inverter stops its
output.
erd
Yes
(The number of retries and the latency between stop and reset can
be specified.)
If "restart after momentary power failure" is selected, this function
invokes a restart process when power has been restored within a
predetermined period.
*1 Available only for induction motor drive.
*2 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later.
8-13
Chapter 9
LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS
The table below lists the main peripheral equipment and options that are connected to the
FRENIC-Mini. Use them in accordance with your system requirements.
For details, refer to the FRENIC-Mini User's Manual (24A7-E-0023), Chapter 6 "SELECTING
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT."
Name of
peripheral
equipment
Molded case
circuit breaker
(MCCB)
Residual-currentoperated
protective device
(RCD)
/Earth leakage
circuit breaker
(ELCB)*
Main peripheral equipment
* with overcurrent
protection
Function and application
MCCBs are designed to protect the power circuits between the power control
board and inverter’s main terminals (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T for three-phase
power, L1/L and L2/N for single-phase power) from overload or short-circuit
which in turn prevents secondary disasters caused by the inverter
malfunctioning.
RCDs/ELCBs function in the same way as MCCBs. Use the MCCBs and
RCDs/ELCBs that satisfy the recommended rated current listed below.
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Threephase
400 V
Singlephase
200 V
Applicable
motor
rating
(kW)
Inverter type
Recommended rated current (A) of
MCCB and RCD/ELCB
w/ DC reactor
0.1
FRN0001C2S-2†
0.2
FRN0002C2S-2†
0.4
FRN0004C2S-2†
0.75
FRN0006C2S-2†
1.5
FRN0010C2S-2†
2.2
FRN0012C2S-2†
3.7
FRN0020C2S-2†
0.4
FRN0002C2S-4†
0.75
FRN0004C2S-4†
1.5
FRN0005C2S-4†
2.2
FRN0007C2S-4†
3.7
(4.0)*
FRN0011C2S-4†
0.1
FRN0001C2S-7†
0.2
FRN0002C2S-7†
0.4
FRN0004C2S-7†
5
w/o DC reactor
5
10
10
20
15
20
30
5
5
10
15
10
5
20
5
10
0.75
FRN0006C2S-7†
10
15
1.5
FRN0010C2S-7†
15
20
2.2
FRN0012C2S-7†
20
30
Note: A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the
shipping destination. For three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it
replaces A or U.
* 4.0 kW for the EU. The inverter type is FRN0011C2S-4E.
9-1
Name of
peripheral
equipment
Function and application
Molded case
circuit breaker
Earth leakage
circuit breaker*
* with overcurrent
protection
When connecting the inverter to the power supply, add a recommended
molded case circuit breaker and earth leakage circuit breaker* in the path
of power supply. Do not use the devices with the rated current out of the
recommenced range.
*With overcurrent protection
Fire could occur.
Select the MCCB or RCD/ELCB with appropriate rated current and breaking
capacity according to the power supply capacity.
Magnetic
contactor (MC)
An MC can be used at both the power input (primary) and output (secondary)
sides of the inverter. At each side, the MC works as described below. When
inserted in the output circuit of the inverter, an MC can also switch the motor
drive power source between the inverter output and commercial power lines.
„ At the power source (primary) side
Main peripheral equipment
Insert an MC in the power source side of the inverter in order to:
1) Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power source (generally,
commercial/factory power lines) with the protection function built into the
inverter, or with the terminal signal line.
2) Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot
interpret the stop command due to internal/external circuit failures.
3) Cut off the inverter from the power source when the MCCB inserted in the
power source side cannot cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose. If
you are to use the MC for this purpose only, it is recommended that you use
an MC capable of turning the MC on/off manually.
When your system requires the motor(s) driven by the inverter to be
started/stopped with the MC, the frequency of the starting/stopping
operation should be once or less per hour. The more frequent the
operation, the shorter operation life of the MC and capacitor/s used in
the DC link bus due to thermal fatigue caused by the frequent charging
of the current flow. If this is not necessary, start/stop the motor with the
terminal commands FWD, REV and/or HLD, or with the keypad.
„ At the output (secondary) side
Prevent externally turned-around current from being applied to the inverter
power output terminals (U, V, and W) unexpectedly. An MC should be used, for
example, if a circuit that switches the motor driving source between the inverter
output and commercial/factory power lines is connected to the inverter.
As application of high voltage external current to the inverter's
secondary (output) circuits may break the IGBTs, MCs should be used
in the power control system circuits to switch the motor drive power
source to the commercial/factory power lines after the motor has come
to a complete stop. Also ensure that voltage is never mistakenly
applied to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected timer
operation, or similar.
„ Driving the motor using commercial power lines
MCs can also be used to switch the power source of the motor driven by the
inverter to a commercial power source.
9-2
Name of option
Function and application
Braking resistors
(Standard model)
(DBRs)
A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration
of the motor and converts it to heat for consumption. Use of a braking
resistor results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter.
DC reactors
(DCRs)
A DCR is mainly used for power supply normalization and for supplied
power-factor reformation (for reducing harmonic components).
1) For power supply normalization
- Use an optional DC reactor (DCR) when the capacity of the power
supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the
inverter's rated capacity.
Otherwise, the percentage-reactance of the power source decreases,
and harmonic components and their peak levels increase. These
factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of
inverter, or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor (which can
shorten the inverter’s service life).
- Also use a DCR when there are thyristor-driven loads or when
phase-advancing capacitors are being turned on/off.
2) For supplied power-factor reformation (harmonic component reduction)
Main option
Generally a capacitor is used to reform the power factor of the load,
however, it cannot be used in a system that includes an inverter. Using a
DCR increases the reactance of inverter’s power source so as to
decrease harmonic components on the power source lines and reform
the power factor of inverter. Using a DCR reforms the input power factor
to approximately 90 to 95%.
At the time of shipping, a jumper bar is connected across the
terminals P1 and P (+) on the terminal block. Remove the jumper
bar when connecting a DCR.
Output circuit filters
(OFLs)
Include an OFL in the inverter power output circuit to:
1) Suppress the voltage fluctuation at the motor input terminals
This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application
of high voltage surge currents by the 400 V class of inverters.
2) Suppress leakage current from the power output (secondary) lines (due
to harmonic components)
This reduces the leakage current when the motor is hooked by long
power feed lines. It is recommended that the length of the power feed line
be kept to less than 400 m.
3) Minimize emission and/or induction noise issued from the power output
(secondary) lines
OFLs are effective in reducing noise from long power feed lines, such as
those used in plants, etc.
Use an OFL within the allowable carrier frequency range specified
by function code F26 (Motor sound (carrier frequency)). Otherwise,
the filter will overheat.
9-3
Other peripheral equipment
Options for Operation and Communications
Main option
Name of option
Ferrite ring reactors for
reducing radio frequency
noise
(ACL)
Function and application
An ACL is used to reduce radio noise emitted by the inverter.
An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency harmonics caused by
switching operation for the power supply (primary) lines inside the
inverter. Pass the power supply lines together through the ACL for 4
turns (coiled 3 times).
If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 20 m, insert
an ACL to the power supply (primary) lines; if it is more than 20 m, insert
it to the power output (secondary) lines of the inverter.
External potentiometer
for frequency commands
An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency.
Connect the potentiometer to control signal terminals [11] to [13] of the
inverter.
Remote keypad
This allows you to perform remote operation of the inverter.
With the remote keypad, you can copy function code data configured in
the inverter to any other inverter.
Keypad models: TP-E1U and TP-E1
Extension cable for
remote operation
The extension cable connects the remote keypad with the inverter for
remote operation. It is also used for connection of a USB–RS-485
converter.
USB–RS-485 converter
A converter is used to easily connect the RS-485 communications port
to a USB port on a PC.
Three lengths are available: 5 m, 3 m and 1 m
(Products supplied by System Sacom Sales Corporation are
recommended.)
Inverter loader software
Windows-based inverter loader software that makes it easy to configure
function code data via the GUI (graphical user interface).
Surge absorbers
A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the power
lines to ensure effective protection of your power system from the
malfunctioning of the magnetic contactors, mini-relays and timers.
Surge killers
A surge killer eliminates surge currents induced by lightening and noise
from the power supply lines. Use of a surge killer is effective in
preventing the electronic equipment, including inverters, from damage
or malfunctioning caused by such surges and/or noise.
Arresters
An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the
power supply lines. Use of an arrester is effective in preventing
electronic equipment, including inverters, from damage or
malfunctioning caused by such surges and/or noise.
Frequency meter
Displays the frequency in accordance with signal output from the
inverter.
9-4
Chapter 10 APPLICATION OF DC REACTORS (DCRs)
Since the "Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home and General-purpose
Appliances" issued by the Ministry of International Trade and Industry (Currently the Ministry of
Economy, Trade and Industry) was revised in January 2004, the general-purpose inverters have no
longer been subject to the guideline. Individual inverter manufacturers have voluntarily employed
harmonics suppression measures. It is recommended that DC reactors (DCRs) specified in Table
10.1 be connected to the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters.
Table 10.1 List of DC Reactors (DCRs)
Power
supply
voltage
Threephase
200 V
Singlephase
200 V
Nominal applied
motor (kW)
Applicable inverter type
DCR type
0.1
FRN0001C2S-2†
0.2
FRN0002C2S-2†
0.4
FRN0004C2S-2†
DCR2-0.4
0.75
FRN0006C2S-2†
DCR2-0.75
1.5
FRN0010C2S-2†
DCR2-1.5
2.2
FRN0012C2S-2†
DCR2-2.2
3.7
FRN0020C2S-2†
DCR2-3.7
0.1
FRN0001C2S-7†
DCR2-0.2
0.2
FRN0002C2S-7†
DCR2-0.4
0.4
FRN0004C2S-7†
DCR2-0.75
0.75
FRN0006C2S-7†
DCR2-1.5
1.5
FRN0010C2S-7†
DCR2-2.2
2.2
FRN0012C2S-7†
DCR2-3.7
DCR2-0.2
Note: A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination.
For three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it replaces A or U.
Figure 10.1 Connection Diagram of DC Reactor (DCR)
10-1
Chapter 11 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS
11.1 Compliance with European Standards
The CE marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive 2004/108/EC issued by the Council of the
European Communities and Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
Inverters that bear a CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive.
The products comply with the following standards:
Low Voltage Directive
EN61800-5-1: 2007
EMC Directives
EN61800-3:
2004 +A1: 2012
Immunity:
Second environment (Industrial)
Emission:
Category C2
(Applicable only when an optional EMC-compliant filter
is attached)
CAUTION
The FRENIC-Mini series of inverters are categorized as a "restricted sales distribution class" of the
EN61800-3. When you use these products with any home appliances or office equipment, you may
need to take appropriate countermeasures to reduce or eliminate any noise emitted from these
products.
11-1
11.2 Compliance with EMC Standards
11.2.1 General
The CE marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including our CE-marked
products is compliant with the EMC Directive. Therefore, CE marking for the equipment shall be
the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer. For this reason, Fuji’s CE mark is indicated under
the condition that the product shall be used within equipment meeting all requirements for the
relevant Directives. Instrumentation of such equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment
manufacturer.
Generally, machinery or equipment includes not only our products but other devices as well.
Manufacturers, therefore, shall design the whole system to be compliant with the relevant
Directives.
In addition, to satisfy the requirements noted above, use a Fuji FRENIC inverter in connection with
an EMC-compliant filter (optional feature) in accordance with the instructions contained in this
instruction manual. Installing the inverter(s) in a metal panel may be necessary, depending upon
the operating environment of the equipment that the inverter is to be used with.
11.2.2 Recommended installation procedure
To make the machinery or equipment fully compliant with the EMC Directive, have certified
technicians wire the motor and inverter in strict accordance with the procedure described below.
■ In case an outboard, EMC-compliant (optional) is used
1) Install the inverter and the filter on a grounded metal plate. Use a shielded cable also for
connection of the motor. Make the motor cable as short as possible. Connect the shielding
layer firmly to the metal plate. Also connect the shielding layer electrically to the grounding
terminal of the motor.
2) Use shielded cable for connection around the control terminals of the inverter and also for
connection of the RS-485 signal cable. As with the motor, clamp the shielding layer firmly to a
grounded plate.
3) If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level, enclose the inverter and its peripherals
within a metal panel as shown in Figure 11.1.
11-2
Figure 11.1 Installing the Inverter with EMC-compliant filter into a Metal Panel
Note 1: Pass the EMC filter input wires through the ferrite ring reactor for reducing radio noise
(ACL-40B) two times.
Note 2: Pass the EMC filter output wires (shielded cable and grounding wire in a bundle) through
the ferrite ring reactor for reducing radio noise (ACL-40B) two times.
Note 3: Connect the shielding layer of the shielded cable to the motor and panel electrically and
ground the motor and panel.
Radiated noise varies greatly depending upon the installation environment. When no
ferrite ring reactor is used, make sure that the radiated noise does not exceed the
permissible level.
11-3
11.2.3 Leakage current of EMC-complaint filter (optional)
Table 11.1 Leakage Current of EMC-compliant Filter (optional)
Inverter type
For Japan
FRN0.1C2S-2J
FRN0.2C2S-2J
FRN0.4C2S-2J
FRN0.75C2S-2J
FRN1.5C2S-2J
FRN2.2C2S-2J
FRN3.7C2S-2J
FRN0.4C2S-4J
FRN0.75C2S-4J
FRN1.5C2S-4J
FRN2.2C2S-4J
FRN3.7C2S-4J
FRN0.1C2S-7J
FRN0.2C2S-7J
FRN0.4C2S-7J
FRN0.75C2S-7J
FRN1.5C2S-7J
FRN2.2C2S-7J
For other countries
FRN0001C2S-2†
FRN0002C2S-2†
FRN0004C2S-2†
FRN0006C2S-2†
FRN0010C2S-2†
FRN0012C2S-2†
FRN0020C2S-2†
FRN0002C2S-4†
FRN0004C2S-4†
FRN0005C2S-4†
FRN0007C2S-4†
FRN0011C2S-4†
FRN0001C2S-7†
FRN0002C2S-7†
FRN0004C2S-7†
FRN0006C2S-7†
FRN0010C2S-7†
FRN0012C2S-7†
Filter type
Leakage current (mA) *1), *2)
Normal
Worst
FS5956-6-46
(EFL-0.75E11-2)
3.0
3.0
FS5956-26-47
(EFL-4.0E11-2)
3.0
3.0
FS20229-3, 5-07
3.0
18.0
FS20229-9-07
3.0
18.0
FS20229-13-07
3.0
18.0
FS8082-10-07
4.0
8.1
FS20159-17-07
FS20159-25-07
4.2
4.2
8.4
8.4
Note: A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination. For
three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it replaces A or U.
*1) The values are calculated assuming the power supplies of three-phase 240 V (50 Hz), three-phase
400 V (50 Hz), and single-phase 230 V (50 Hz).
*2) The worst condition includes a phase loss in the supply line.
11-4
11.3 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU
11.3.1 General comments
When you use general-purpose industrial inverters in the EU, the harmonics emitted from the
inverter to power lines are strictly regulated as stated below.
If an inverter whose rated input is 1 kW or less is connected to public low-voltage power supply, it
is regulated by the harmonics emission regulations from inverters to power lines (with the
exception of industrial low-voltage power lines). Refer to Figure 11.2 below for details.
Figure 11.2 Power Source and Regulation
11-5
11.3.2 Compliance with the harmonic component regulation
Table 11.2 Compliance with Harmonic Component Regulation
Power supply
voltage
Three-phase
200 V
Three-phase
400 V
Single-phase
200 V
w/o DC reactor
w/ DC reactor
Applicable
DC reactor type
FRN0001C2S-2†
√*
√*
DCR2-0.2
FRN0002C2S-2†
√*
√*
DCR2-0.2
FRN0004C2S-2†
√*
√*
DCR2-0.4
FRN0006C2S-2†
√*
√*
DCR2-0.75
FRN0002C2S-4†
—
√
DCR4-0.4
FRN0004C2S-4†
—
√
DCR4-0.75
Inverter type
FRN0001C2S-7†
—
√
DCR2-0.2
FRN0002C2S-7†
—
√
DCR2-0.4
FRN0004C2S-7†
—
√
DCR2-0.75
FRN0006C2S-7†
—
—
DCR2-1.5
* Inverter types marked with √ in the table above are compliant with the EN61000-3-2 (+A14), so they may
be connected to public low-voltage power supply unconditionally.
Conditions apply when connecting models marked with "—". If you want to connect them to public lowvoltage power supply, you need to obtain permission from the local electric power supplier. In general,
you will need to provide the supplier with the harmonics current data of the inverter. To obtain the data,
contact your Fuji Electric representative.
Note 1) A box (†) in the above table replaces A, C, E, or U depending on the shipping destination. For
three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it replaces A or U.
2) When supplying three-phase 200 VAC power stepped down from a three-phase 400 VAC power
line using a transformer, the level of harmonic flow from the 400 VAC line will be regulated.
11.4 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive in the EU
11.4.1 General
General-purpose inverters are regulated by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU. Fuji Electric has
obtained the proper certification for the Low Voltage Directive from the official inspection agency.
Fuji Electric states that all our inverters with CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage
Directive.
11.4.2 Points for consideration when using the FRENIC-Mini series in a system to be
certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU
If you want to use the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters in systems/equipment in the EU, refer to the
guidelines on page viii.
11-6
Compact Inverter
Instruction Manual
First Edition, March 2013
Second Edition, June 2013
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling, setting up and
operating of the FRENIC-Mini series of inverters. Please feel free to send your comments regarding
any errors or omissions you may have found, or any suggestions you may have for generally
improving the manual.
In no event will Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the
application of the information in this manual.
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
Gate City Ohsaki, East Tower, 11-2, Osaki 1-chome, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-0032, Japan
Phone: +81 3 5435 7058
Fax: +81 3 5435 7420
URL http://www.fujielectric.com/
2013-06 (F13a/C13)
Open as PDF
Similar pages